'>. 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 1.1 
 
 11.25 
 
 u Sift 
 
 t 1^ iio 
 
 21 
 2.2 
 
 1.8 
 
 M 11116 
 
 
 
 Hiotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 \ 
 
 ,V 
 
 •SS 
 
 ■% 
 
 o 
 
 
 
7^ . W^ 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 4S 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquaa at bibliographiquaa 
 
 The* 
 toth 
 
 The institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 Couverture endommag^e 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurie et/ou peillculte 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Ls titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes gAographiques en couleur 
 
 □ Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre do couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 D 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Reli4 avac d'autres documents 
 
 1 y I ^^^^ binding may causa shadows or distortion 
 
 I — i along interior margin/ 
 
 La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion l« long da la marge intiriaure 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certainee pages blanches ajoutAes 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissant dana la taxta. 
 mais. lorsque cela Atait possible, cas pages n'ont 
 pas iti fiimtea. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl^mentaires: 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm* la meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a ^ti possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-4tre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una 
 modification dans la mithoda normale de filmage 
 sont indiquis ci-dessous. 
 
 r~n Coloured pages/ 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagies 
 
 □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurias et/ou pelliculAes 
 
 rr?! Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 L2lJ Pages dicoiories, tacheties ou piquies 
 
 □ Pages detached/ 
 Pages ditach^s 
 
 r^''^ Showthrough/ 
 L— J Transparence 
 
 □ Quality of print varies/ 
 Qualiti inigale de ('impression 
 
 □ Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du matiriei supplAmentaire 
 
 □ Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 The I 
 poss 
 ofth 
 film! 
 
 Origl 
 
 begli 
 
 thai 
 
 sion, 
 
 othe 
 
 first 
 
 sion, 
 
 or ill 
 
 n 
 
 Pagea wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Lea pages totalement ou partieilement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, r.ne peiure, 
 etc.. ont Ati film^s i nouveau dr fapon A 
 obtonir la meilleura image possible. 
 
 The 
 shall 
 TINl 
 whic 
 
 Map 
 difffl 
 entii 
 begi 
 righl 
 requ 
 met! 
 
 10X 
 
 IbUIII 
 
 •III « 
 
 ■( III 
 
 14X 
 
 u \uu 
 
 X av 
 
 reau 
 
 Biion 
 18X 
 
 moH 
 
 lue c 
 
 i-oes 
 
 sous 
 22X 
 
 
 
 
 28X 
 
 
 
 
 aox 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s/ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X 
 
 
 
The copy filmed here hes been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 Metropolitan Toronto Library 
 Canadian History Department 
 
 L'exemplaire filmi fut reproduit grice h la 
 gAnirositA de: 
 
 Metropolitan Toronto Library 
 Canadian History Department 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in Iceeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Las inisges suivantes ont 6t4 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettet* de l'exemplaire filmi, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when nppropriata. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 Les exempiaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimis sont filmis en commen^ant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 derniire pege qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exempiaires 
 originaux sont filmte en commen^ant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration at en terminant par 
 la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol —^ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"). or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaftra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbols — ► signifie "A SUIVRE". le 
 symbols V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmte k des t9ux de reduction diff6rents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un ssul clich6, 11 est film6 d partir 
 de i'engie sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images nicessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mithode. 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 
i ■ 
 
 ^■i 
 
 pf 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 f 
 
 1j 
 
 1 
 
 f-l-f ni*.!!!.*!^ 
 
'il: 
 
 r' 
 
 ..ft* 
 
 i 
 
 IIsTTIS/OIDTJOTIOISr 
 
 TO THE 
 
 ANALYTICAL 
 
 AND 
 
 PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 OP THE 
 
 ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 
 
 By Rev. PETER BULLIONS, D. D., 
 
 authoe op the series oe geammars, bkgli8h, latin, akd 
 geeee:, on the same flan. 
 
 BEYISED EDITION. 
 
 TORONTO: 
 ADAM MILLER. 62 KING STREET EAST. 
 
 1865. 
 
 -*X. 
 
Bnllions' Series of Grammars, etc. 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO ANALYT. AND PRAC. GRAMMAR. 
 
 ANALYTICAL AND PRACTICAL ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 EXERCISES IN ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 
 
 LATIN LESSONS, by Spencer, introductory to Bullions*. 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 LATIN READER. 
 
 LATIN EXERCISES. 
 
 CJESAR. CICERO. SALLUST. 
 
 LATIN ENGLISH DICTIONARY, (v^ith Synonyms). 
 
 GREEK LESSONS. GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 GREEK READER. COOPER'S VIRGIL. 
 
 The Normal Mathematical Series. 
 
 STODDARD'S JUVENILE MENTAL ARITHMETIC. 
 STODDARD'S INTELLECTUAL ARITHMETIC. 
 STODDARD'S RUDIMENTS OF ARITHMETIC. 
 STODDARD'S PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC. 
 STODDARD & HENKLE'S ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA- 
 STODDARD & HENKLE'S UNIVERSITY ALGEBRA. 
 KEY TO S.'S INTELL. AND PRAC. ARITHMETICS. 
 KEY TO S. & H.'S ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA. 
 KEY TO S. & H'S. UNIVERSITY ALGEBRA. 
 
 Physiology, Logic, Astronomy, etc. 
 
 FIRST BOOK. 
 RHETORIC. 
 
 HOOKER'S HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. 
 WHATELY'S ELEM. OF LOGIC. 
 THOMPSON'S LAV7S OF THOUGHT. 
 WAYLAND'S INTELLECTUAL PHILOSOPHY. 
 BBOCKLESBY'S ASTRONOMY. METEOROLOGY. 
 
 PALMER'S PRACTICAL BOOK-KEEPING. 
 COMSTOOK'S NAT, PHILOSOPHY. CHEMISTRY. 
 
 hio 
 
 Jl****.. 
 

 AR. 
 AB. 
 
 Uoy^'gJG*^.^ PREFACE. 
 
 lUST. 
 
 
 "■■* 
 
 !• 
 
 lA. 
 
 BOOK. 
 RIC. 
 
 LOGY. 
 SiRY. 
 
 This little work has been prepared to serve as an Introduction to 
 the Author's *' Analytical and Practical Grammar of the English 
 Language." The definitions and rules are the same, throughout, 
 as in that work, and are arranged in the same order. 
 
 The work is divided into Lessons, each of which is devoted to 
 some one topic. The arrangement in each Lesson, is the same 
 throughout ; except that the Questions on each Rule of Syntax are 
 l«ft to be framed by the teacher. That orde is the following : — 
 The Definitions and Rules belonging to the Lesson, and intended to 
 be commited to memory, are placed first, in large type. Next to 
 these, any subordinate matter regarded as proper for so brief a corn- 
 pond, is subjoined in smaller type, to bt carefully read and itudied 
 with the Lesson. Then, a series of Questions so framed that c<|- 
 rect answers will bring out all the leading facta contained in the 
 preceding text. And lastly, practical Exercises are subjoined, foy 
 the purpose of reducing immediately to practice, the knowledge 
 acquired, and fixing it, in the easiest and most effectual manner, in 
 the understanding. 
 
 The Exercises in most of the Lessons, are capable of being used 
 in a variety of ways ; and ample directions are giyen,as to the man- 
 ner in which they are intended to be used. 
 
 In Etymology, " Illustrations" are occasionally thrown in, to 
 show in what manner important principles in Grammar may be sim- 
 plified to the young learner; and, in Syntax, a plain and familiar 
 "Explanation " is subjoined to each Rule, for the same purpose. 
 
 Prefixed to the Rules of Syntax, there has been introduced a num- 
 ber of Lessons on the Analysis of Sentences. This useful exercise 
 is presented in such a way as to be easily understood ; and to an 
 extent sufficient for beginners ; and the whole illustrated by a num- 
 ber of Models of Analysis, which will serve as a guide to the pupil 
 in preparing his lessons in this department. 
 
 As it is of great importance to keep the acquisitions of pupils 
 already made, always at hand, and to impress them indelibly on their 
 
IV 
 
 PEERAGE. 
 
 U 
 
 minds by repeated reviews of previous Lessons, it will be seen that 
 directions are given at the beginning of each Lesson, for carrying 
 this useful practice into efifect. 
 
 Another feature in this work is, that with the principles of Gram- 
 mar, at every step, are combined instructions and exercises in the 
 elementary principles of Composition. Analysis and Compositiou 
 are carried on together. Directions for parsing each part of speech, 
 with accompanying examples for practice, are given as soon as it 
 has been treated of. And, in like manner, the proper method of 
 combining words for the purpose of expressing our ideas, is pointed 
 out, and Exercises are devised, as soon as the pupil has been made 
 acquainted with the classes of words capable of being combined. 
 One Exercise of this kind, sometimes more, is connected with al- 
 most every Rule of Syntax, as at once an exercise on the Rule, and 
 a praxis on Composition. 
 
 As Orthography belongs more strictly to the Spelling Book, and 
 Prosody is a study for more advanced pupils than those for whom 
 tjis work is intended, they are introduced here only for the sake of 
 form, and of course little is said respecting them. Though this work 
 is not intended to be a complete treatise on English Grammar, no 
 pains have been spared to render it useful so far as it goes. It 
 contains as much as any work of its size, presented in a neat and 
 perspicuous manner; and moreover, possesses some new and pecu- 
 liar features, whioh claim the candid attention and examination of ' 
 all who feel an interest in simplifying the process of education to 
 the youthful mind, and doing the most good in the shortest time, 
 in the simplest and most pleasing manner, at the earliest period 
 and at the least expense. 
 
 Those who commence the study of Grammar after the age of 
 twelve or fourteen, stand in no need of this work. They should 
 commence at once with the Analytical and Pra.^tioal Grammar, 
 which contains a complete ecnrse of English Grammar, without any 
 other book, and is sufficiently simple for pupils of that age. But 
 young pupils, by going through this, will enter, even at an earlier 
 period, on the study of the larger Grammar with great advantage. 
 N.B. The numbers in parentheses, as (109) p. 10, refer to the 
 current numbers in the Analytical and Practical Grammar, where 
 the subject is more fully treated. 
 TaoT, N. Y,, August, 1862. 
 
 ■..!..- . 
 
 ^^-^^^^jg^ssfftT'ifi^imaUMrM 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Lesson. Page* 
 
 1 Definition and Division, *? 
 
 PART FIRST.— ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 2 Concerning Letters and Syllables, ., 'J 
 
 PART SEOOND.—ETYMOLOGY. . 
 
 8 Division of Words, 8 
 
 4 Of Nouns, JJ 
 
 5 Of Person, H 
 
 6 Of Gender, 12 
 
 7 Of Number, 1* 
 
 8 Of the Cases of Nouns, • ^8 
 
 9 Of the Article, 20 
 
 10 Of the Adjective....... 22 
 
 11 Comparison of Adjectives, 24 
 
 12 Of the Pronomi 26 
 
 13 Of Relative Pronouns, 30 
 
 14 Of Adjective Pronotms, 83 
 
 16 Exercises on Nouns, Articles, Adjectives, and Pronouns,. . 35 
 
 16 Of Verbs • 36 
 
 11 Division of Verbs , 39 
 
 18 Inflection of Verbs,. 41 
 
 19 Of the Moods, 43 
 
 20 Of Tenses, or Distinctions of Time, 44 
 
 21 Of the Participles, 48 
 
 22 Of Number and Person, 49 
 
 23 Of the Conjugation of Verbs, 61 
 
 24 The Verb "To Love," 67 
 
 26 Negative Form of the Verb, 61 
 
 26 Interrogative Form of the Verb, 62 
 
 27 Progresaive Form of the Active Voice, 68 
 
 28 Passive Voice, 64 
 
 29 Of Irregular Verbs, 68 
 
 30 Defective and Impersonal Verbs 78 
 
 31 Of Adverbs, '?4 
 
 32 Of Prepositions J6 
 
 33 Of Interjections, ^8 
 
 84 Of Conjunctions, ^^ 
 
 36 How to Distinguish the Parts of Speech, 81 
 
 86 Parsing, 82 
 
 87 Model of Etymological Parsing, 84 
 
 88 Exercises in Parsing, 86 
 
n 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 ilf 
 
 PART THIRD— SYNTAX. 
 Lessok. 
 
 89 General Principles of Syntax, 
 
 40 Analysis of Sentences,— Simple Sentences.*.*! 
 
 41 The Subject, 
 
 42 Modifications of the Subject, .....!*.! 1 *!'..* *. 
 
 43 Modification of the Modifying Words^, .'.'.* * * .' 
 
 44 The Predicate * 
 
 45 Modifications of the Predicate, ...!.*!!!!!.'.' 
 
 46 Compound Sentences [[\\ 
 
 4*7 Connection of Clauses, !.'!!!.*.'.' 
 
 48 Abridged Propositions, !.*.*.!!!!.* 
 
 49 Directions for Analysis.—Model, ....!!.'!!! 
 60 Construction of Sentencesj—Parts of Syntax, 
 51 Rule I. Substantives in Annnaif.mn 
 
 52 
 
 II. 
 
 53 
 
 III. 
 
 54 
 
 IV. 
 
 55 
 
 V. 
 
 56 
 
 VI. 
 
 57 
 
 VII. 
 
 58 
 
 VIII. 
 
 59 
 
 
 60 
 
 IX. 
 
 61 
 
 X. 
 
 62 
 
 XI. 
 
 63 
 
 XII. 
 
 64 
 
 XIII. 
 
 65 
 
 XIV. 
 
 66 
 
 XV. 
 
 67 
 
 XVI. 
 
 68 
 
 XVII. 
 
 69 
 
 XVIU 
 
 70 
 
 XIX. 
 
 71 
 
 XX. 
 
 Substantives in Apposition 
 
 An Adjective with a Sustantive, . . '. . . . ]... 
 
 The Article and its Noun, .' .* ' 
 
 Personal Pronouns, .'.*,'.*.'!.' 
 
 The Relative and its Antecedent. !!!!!!!.". 
 
 The Subject Nominative, 
 
 The Nominative Absolute or Independent..* .* 
 
 The Verb and its Nominative,. 
 
 Special Rules under Rule VIII., .* .* 
 
 The Predicative Nominative, <feo., . . . ! .W ! ! 
 
 The Objective Governed by Verbs, 
 
 The Objective Governed by Prepositions, . . 
 
 Prepositions used after certain Words, 
 
 The Possessive Case, ',','.'/, 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood, .... , 
 
 The Infinitive Mood, , . . . , *.*.'.*.**.'** 
 
 The Participles, .......!!!!!.*!!!!![ 
 
 Connection of Tenses, '..'.*.'.!.'.'*!! 
 
 XVIU. Construction of Adverl», ...,,!...'.'*.!!.* * 
 
 '"" Construction of Conjunctions, .....!!.*!.*.'!! 
 
 Interjections, !!.'!!! 
 
 72 General Rule of Syntax,. 
 
 73 Ellipsis, Rule 1.— An Ellipsis admissible' 
 
 74 '* « 2.— Ellipsis not aUowable, . 
 
 75 Model of Syntactical Parsing, 
 
 76 Promiscuous Exercises for Correction, 
 
 77 Punctuation, , , 
 
 78 Capitals, ...!..' 
 
 PART FOURTa—PROSODT. 
 
 79 Prosody. Elocution, Verslficatioiv 
 
 80 CoVFORiTrow , "it 
 
 u 
 
 «.*... 
 
 Fagb. 
 . 87 
 . 88 
 . 89 
 . 90 
 . 90 
 . 91 
 . 92 
 . 93 
 . 94 
 . 95 
 , 96 
 100 
 , 101 
 102 
 103 
 104 
 106 
 107 
 107 
 108 
 109 
 109 
 110 
 112 
 118 
 U5 
 116 
 117 
 118 
 121 
 122 
 125 
 128 
 129 
 180 
 181 
 182 
 183 
 184 
 185 
 
 186 
 
 « Ate 
 
 d^ 
 
 4 
 
 J?* -^■-■" ■ ■'-S'JiS S i ai 
 
 MUM 
 
 «*SSa«!3*±«SHteB, 
 
 «aM 
 
 ■MM 
 
ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Lesson 1. — Definition and Division. 
 [Commit Definitions and Rules accurately to memory.] 
 
 English Geammab is the art of speaking 
 and writing the English Language with pro- 
 
 priety. ^ ^ 
 
 It is divided into four parts ; namely, Or" 
 thography, Etymology. Syntax, and Prosody. 
 
 PART EIR8T.— ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 Ijesson 2. — Letters and Syllables, 
 [Review the preceding Lesson.] 
 
 Orthography treats of letters, and the 
 mode of combining them into syllables and 
 words. 
 
 A Lkttbb is a character representing a particular sound of the 
 human voice. 
 
 There are Twenty-six letters in the English Alphabet. 
 
 Letters are either Vo\rels or Consonants. 
 
 A Vowel is a letter which represents a simple inartieulistf sound ; 
 and, in a word or syllable, may be sounded alone. The voWels we 
 a, e, i, 0, u, and w and y not before another vowel sounded m the 
 same syllable, as in lato, bay. 
 
 A Consonant is a letter which represents an ariiculaie sound; 
 and in a word or ey 11 able is never sounded alone, but always m 
 connection with a vowel. The consonants are 6, c, dyft jr, h,j, «, 
 I, m, n, p, q, r, », t, w, ar, «, and w and y before a vowel soaoded m 
 the same syllable, as in watt youth. 
 
 A DiphtJiong is the union of two vowels in one sound ; ae, <;»« In 
 wt, oi in ail. They are of two kinds, Proper and Improper, 
 
8 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 Hi 
 
 i!M 
 
 n.TIlOBt7CTION TO ANALITIOAL OBAMMAB. 
 
 in ta^f ^""^ '■' ""> -"'o" "' "■'- vowels in „„« ,„„„d , „ ^ 
 
 ^otf'^flU^^J:^X Tet tr l"^ """ !?■?>"" «" ""' 
 «<i-j/«, o.«-nW. ^ * "' "»™ le"«r»; /arm, /orm.«r, 
 
 A word of one .yllable i, called a Mo^o^jUm, 
 
 A word of two eylhble, i, caUed a Di..yllZ 
 
 A word of three syllable, is ealJed a Trl,l,aiL 
 
 A word of .ore than three syllables is cliled a Poly^lla^u. 
 
 by Uf/d^r «^ -P-^. a word 
 
 „. . . „ ,. QOESTIONS. 
 
 MeS{Ll^''Ct'^Ttio^a^h'7"A"7-"^'^^ 
 paany letters are there in EnffUshf ^?i . ^?f ' ".? '«"«■• ' How 
 IS a vowel ?-a eonsonant ?%™, tti^I"1 "leydirided ! What 
 vowels » When, oonMnants » ^^t Tl"^- J^^ "« " "d V 
 ^PfaftoDgJ-an improper SphtwJ!.''»S?'"''8'-» P"P« 
 syllable? What i. a word of one s^IiIm-. J*^ '''?8'-^''»« 's a 
 ttree ?-of four or more ? Wto is^X g^" '""'' "" '-" 
 
 PART SECOND.-ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Lesson Q.—DiviHon of Words. 
 ^ovew the preceding Lessons, and answer the qaestions.l 
 
 S^v^ttT '''^'"' ^^d^oatioBs. and their 
 
 A woED 18 an articulate sound used W 
 common cons^t as the sign of Tn idS^ 
 Words are divided into ^J^^l.^.l^^- 
 called ' """•-^^iii' iJiasses, 
 
 ^ V,.. 
 
PAETS OF SPEECH. 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 The parts of speech in the English lan- 
 guage are nine ; viz., The Nmn^ Article, Ad- 
 jective, Fronotm, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, 
 Interjection, and Conjunction. 
 
 Of these, the Notm, Fronomi, and Verb, 
 are declined ; the rest are indeclinable. 
 
 A Substantive is a noun, or any word or 
 phrase used as a noun. 
 
 Obs. a Declinable word is one which undergoes certain changes 
 tf/orm or termination, to expreBS the diflferent relations of gender, 
 number, case, person, Ac, usually termed in Grammar Accidents ; 
 as man, men ; love, loves^ loved. 
 
 An Indeclinable word is one which undergoes no change of form ; 
 OS, good, some, perhaps, . 
 
 ILLUSTRATION.— To speak is to say what we think. What 
 one sajs in speaking is called speech or language. All speech is 
 made up of words, each one of which has its own meaning and use. 
 Any number of words properly arranged so as to express a thought, 
 or make complete sense, is called a sentence. Words are divided 
 into diflferent sorts or classes called parts of speeclh according to 
 their meaning, and use in speaking, i. e. Some words are names df 
 things and are called nouns; some qualify or limit the meaning of 
 nouns, and are called adjectives ; some stand instead of nouns, and 
 are called pronouns, &c, [See above and the definitions of the diff- 
 erent parts of speech.] To take the words of a sentence separately, 
 and tell to what class of words each belongs and describe it, is 
 called Parsing. Hence, 
 
 Parsing is the resolving of a sentence into 
 its elements or parts of speech. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What does Etymology treat of? What are words ? What are 
 they divided into I What are these classes^called ? How many 
 parts of speech are ih<^e ? Name theiii. Vf hich are aecimauio f 
 Which are indeclinable ? What is a declinable word ?— -an inde- 
 clinable? What is Parsing? 
 
 •♦■«>i,.»,4 
 
*-v.. 
 
 ! . 
 
 ii 
 
 10 WTBOBUOIION 10 AKALTTICAL OBAMMAK. 
 
 Lesson 4.— iV^o^^^^. 
 
 Nouns are either Pr«p,^ or Common. 
 
 uudiomy, as, .A?^^^, London, the Ohio 
 A ?,;/.,,? «»rt ; as, «,«„, «fe, 500*. 
 
 hear, or think, has a name f tLt n5r„ -"^^''^ ^ ?«''««'» «an speak, 
 Names common to all thb% of tSrs^m^^^^ '' ^^"^^^ * «<>«« 
 ^r^'^- no..,; as, ^/«n!lU«L^V74^^^^^^^^ «'ass are called 
 Names applied onlv fn L^- -a . . • ' *'^' country. 
 
 ^^^mes, London, Enalatid cLJ^ ' ^^' '^^^^^ Lucy, Friday 
 orclasses; Pro^;Sns^ii,fe 
 
 "ira« ' 18 the name of a class or^^^ciesan^t'* ^>T '^' »«"» 
 all, or IS common to all the indiviEl 1' f? .".^PP^^^^ ^^"ally to 
 18 a name that belongs onl v to cUS inSt -f '^''; ^"'^ " 'Tohn- 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 TTnder common n„„„s are usually mnked, 
 
 .' ^r;zro~: :^-'"'"^«= -. -y. peop.o. 
 
 3. V»b<a noun,, or Z~ "f,''"'.""'' «'• P-'^'r. "iokednesa. 
 
 ^^The accidents of nouns are P^r^nn «..^.„ 
 ^^wrrioer, and Uase. i^'^"-*-,!, 
 
 
 ■»*imiinm' "v.fc^ 
 
 ■iiS^a ig l!! ;" ' '"*" ' * "*' 
 
PBESON. ' 
 
 u 
 
 QUESTIONS, 
 wvint ifl ft noun \ How many kinds of nouns are there ! What 
 is^commLnor! What is a proper noun ! What part of speeeh 
 L^e n^Tof things? What is a collective noun?-an abstract 
 Soun!-a verbal nouni Are these nouns proper or common? 
 What Accidents belong to nouns ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Point out the nm'n.^ in the following sentences ; say why ^^ey are 
 nouns. Tell whether they are proper or common, and why. Exer- 
 cises of this kind may be taken from any book. ^ ^ , . 
 
 The table and chairs in this room belong to Eobert. 
 The houses and streets in New-Tork are J^rger Jhan 
 those in Albany. The principal cities m t^e Stat^^^^^^ 
 New-York, are New-York, Albany, Utica, Eochester, 
 and Buffalo. Wheat, corn, ry^, and oats, are extensively 
 cultivated. Apples, pears, cherries, 'plunj^, and other 
 fmits abound.' George ^is older than John ; they both 
 study arithmetic and grammar. 
 
 Lesson 5,— Person. 
 [Review the thr«e preceding liesaons, and answer the questions.] 
 
 Person, in grammar, denotes the relation 
 of a noun or pronoun to what is said in dis- 
 course. CI ^ A 
 
 The persons are three. First, Second, and 
 
 Thivd, 
 
 A noun is in the first person, when it 
 denotes the speaker or writer ; as, " I Paul 
 
 have written it.*' i, -i. 
 
 A noun is in fhe second person, when it 
 denotes the persoa or thing addressed ; ^ as, 
 « Thou, Ood, sees* me"—" Hail Liberty. 
 
 A noun is in the third person, when it 
 denotes the person or thing spoxieii Oi ; aSj 
 ^«2Vf^^^ is mighty." 
 
 \ ■ 
 
.^• 
 
 k..^ 
 
 .'»- 
 
 «m «peak or be spoken ,0. neaTr"""' ' ''"""'» ™ch only 
 spoken of. ' J ■> blether person or thing, L, J 
 
 first peraoD L, if' ''* ^'"^ dou^^ without oh. '"*™<''"''>^'>i<!i> 
 
 proper ami 11 "^"^''^ '"^^tioned. -The dfS t-"^' '^** ^' » of the 
 
 Wh.f • QUESTIOIfs. 
 
 *» iiat IS a Derson i tt« 
 
 tA^^i 'Jo --"dT fhra "rwr; ^'■'" "- 
 
 Nouns denotiiia-/J.«,v.7.„._. ^ 
 
 i; ! 
 
 t?^:^^ 
 
GEN DEB. 
 
 13 
 
 Nouns denoting neither males mov females 
 are Neuter ; as, boolc^ house , field. 
 
 There are three ways of distinguishing the 
 sexes. 
 
 1. By diflferent words ; as, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Bachelor 
 
 maid 
 
 Hart 
 
 roe 
 
 Beau 
 
 belle 
 
 Horse 
 
 mare 
 
 Boy 
 
 girl 
 
 Husband 
 
 wife 
 
 Brother 
 
 sister 
 
 King 
 
 queen 
 
 Buck 
 
 doe 
 
 Master 
 
 'mistress 
 
 Bull 
 
 cow 
 
 Nephew 
 
 niece 
 
 Drake 
 
 duck 
 
 Ram, buck ewe 
 
 Father 
 
 mother 
 
 Son 
 
 daughter 
 
 Friar 
 
 nun 
 
 stag 
 
 hind 
 
 Oauder 
 
 goose 
 
 Uncle 
 
 aunt 
 
 
 2. By a difference of Termination ; as, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fsnu 
 
 Masc, 
 
 Fern, 
 
 Abbot 
 
 abbess 
 
 Jew 
 
 Jewess 
 lioness 
 
 Actor 
 
 actress 
 
 Lion 
 
 Arbiter 
 
 arbitress 
 
 Patron 
 
 -:.. , patroness 
 
 Baron 
 
 baroness 
 
 Peer 
 
 peeress 
 
 Bridegroom bride 
 
 Poet 
 
 poetess 
 
 Puke 
 
 duchess 
 
 Prince 
 
 princess 
 
 Emperor 
 
 empress 
 
 Shepherd 
 
 shepherdess 
 
 Enchanter enchantress 
 
 Sorcerer 
 
 sorceress 
 
 Executor 
 
 executrix 
 
 Tutor 
 
 tutoress 
 
 Heir 
 
 heiress 
 
 Viscount 
 
 viscountess 
 
 Hero 
 
 heroine 
 
 Widower 
 
 widow 
 
 Host 
 
 hostess 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1, By prefixing a 
 
 distinguishing word ; as, 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 ' Fern. 
 
 
 A eock sparrow 
 
 
 A hen sparrow 
 
 
 A he goat 
 
 t 
 
 'A 9he (;oat 
 
 
 A man servant 
 
 
 A maid servant 
 
 < 
 
 A male child 
 Male descendants . 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 A/0ma20ehild 
 Female descendants 
 
 OBSERVIJIONS. 
 1. Some nouns are either masculine or feminine ; ub, parent, ««r- 
 vanty neighbor. Such are aometim iaid to be of the eomman gender 
 
I ! 
 
 1 ! 
 
 i' 
 
 . . 
 
 14 INTEODTIOTION TO AKALTTICAL OBAMMAb: 
 
 the sun, ^^He is setting ;'' f the I' J ?^^^^ 'Y^^- ^e say of 
 ship, "^A. sails." "^^emooD, ^A. is echpsed ;" and of a 
 
 8. Animals of inferior size, or whose sex i« nnf t 
 spoken of as neuter. Thus of a <^hZ ^"'''^°' "« <>ft«° 
 
 creature." ' "^^ * '^'^^ '^^ "^^^ s^J, " It is a lovely 
 
 QTIESTIOiys. 
 What is a srender ? TJn-m 
 the m.«cuJi«e gender denote S I™?"-" T *«"' What doe. 
 non„8 are saidto be masouUne ? wSTl'T'hf "ju'er 8 Wha? 
 
 they J When a poim denotes eithfr»„ ?'•*?''' What ate 
 gender ia it jometimee eaidtobe whS. t '"' " '^'""'«' »' ''^^ 
 IfcowD, of what gender are their name. I '"^ ""^ «nin,al.i. not 
 
 ' EXERCISES. 
 
 .«.:?;«erf c^ar„tr..i^t«". -^ 
 
 paper, pen. ink. parent, nef^rfri;^^?' '''"'P.'«»<'» 
 taron. negro, hero, house, tltb^mol's;^ ^0'°"' 
 
 «iif 
 
 |\| 
 
 Reason 1. -^number. 
 
 [Beview the three preceding le,3on. and answer the questions.] 
 
 wmch It expresses one. or more than one. ^ 
 tfie wural, more tk/^^^'^ "'""'*' **^'" 
 
KUMBEB. 
 
 16 
 
 GENERAL HULE. 
 
 The Plural is commonly formed by adding 
 s to the singular ; as book, books. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 1 . Nouns in s, sh, ch soft, z, x, or o, form 
 the plural by adding es ; as, Miss, Misses ; 
 brush, brushes; match, matches; topaz, to- 
 pazes ; fox, foxes; hero, heroes, 
 
 Exo. Nouns in ep, »o, and yo, and in ch sounding A;, have < only ; 
 as, cameo, cameos; folio, folios; monarch, monarchs. Also canto 
 has cantos ; but other nouns in o after a consonant now commonly 
 Add es ; &B grotto, grottoes ; tyro, tyroes, &Q. 
 
 2. Nouns in y after a consonant, change y 
 into ies in the plural ; as Ladi/, ladies. 
 
 Nouns in y after a vowel, follow the gene- 
 ral rule ; as Day, days. 
 
 Also, all proper nouns in y ; as, the Pom- 
 peys; the Tullys. 
 
 3. Nouns in/ or /^, change/ otfe into ves 
 in the plural ; as. Loaf, loaves ; life, lives. 
 
 Exo. But dwarf, BCJ ^\ ief, chief, grief; kerchief, handkerchief, 
 mischief ; gulf, turf, surf .rife ; proof, hoof, roof, reprod^ fol- 
 
 low the general rule. A:m . ans inj^ have their plural in »; as* 
 muff, muffs; except Uaff, which has sometimes staves, 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 See An. and Pr. Gr., 165-160. 
 1. Some nouns form the plural irregularly. They are the fol- 
 lowing : — 
 
 Singular. Plural, Singular. Plural 
 
 Woman 
 Child 
 
 women 
 children 
 
 Qoose 
 Mouse 
 
 teeth 
 
 mice 
 

 I I 
 
 i\ 
 
 16 ^ mTnOJ>VClO^ TO A^ALIIICA, oaAMMAB. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Foot 
 
 Ox 
 
 -Plural. 
 
 feet 
 
 oxen 
 
 lice 
 pence 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Louse 
 
 Pennj 
 
 -Plural. 
 
 brothers 
 
 brethren 
 
 sows or swine 
 
 dice 
 
 dies 
 
 aids-de'camp 
 
 courts-martial 
 
 cousins-german 
 
 fathers-in-law, cfec. 
 
 Singular. 
 Brother (one of the same family) 
 
 Brother (one of the same society) 
 feow or swine 
 
 Die (for gaming) 
 
 Die (for coining) 
 
 -A id-de-camp 
 
 Court-martial 
 
 Cousin german 
 
 Father-in-law, (fee. 
 2 ^ '""-"ers-m-iaw, cfec. 
 
 b-t .-.. i. the iXT^:^^::':::::-" •- "'^.'"""" = 
 
 into t (164) ; as, ' ^^ '^^^ **» »«*<> ices; tis 
 
 Automaton 8„t„„«t, ^^ 
 
 ^«« , . .we, M^^3 «?'««« 
 
 ■»«.e; «, the twelve cj;!'; (,6,) '''™' P'"™' »' "■« »me 
 J.^Z:""'"' "* ""^« ■•» •»«" -be™ , as. .„, .,«^. ,„„, 
 
 -e. or 3eieooe,;a:rr;;;^'x: r- ^'"'■-'- ^-^ '-^ 
 
 S. The article a or a« before a 6in«,l» 1 ... _ 
 
 "■" P-ffl; «8, eiDgalar, a «<.»,- plural mm7""' " "'"'''**' '~^'"'* 
 
 '■il 
 
BAMMAE. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 lice 
 
 pence 
 
 rs 
 3n 
 !• swine 
 
 oanip 
 Qartial 
 german 
 in-law, <fec. 
 
 in their original 
 « in the plural ; 
 ^. into ice«; us 
 
 Plur. 
 
 crises 
 apices 
 ■' magi 
 
 refer to a race 
 3 of the same 
 
 » weighed or 
 , temperanee, 
 
 bellawSt icM- 
 
 slieep, trout, 
 
 >n, either sin- 
 ««; and the 
 
 pped before 
 
 NUMBEE. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 If 
 
 What is meant by number? How many numbers are there? 
 Whardoes the singular denote ?-the plural ? How is the plural 
 
 commonly Lmed? When is the plural f<^»;?jf2U^iXr J 
 How do nouns in y after a consonant, form the pluraU— alter a 
 vowel ?-Zn8 in f ov fe? When have proper names a i)lural 
 What nouns are mostly singular ? What nouns are plural only 
 What SZs are alike ^in both numbers? What nouns are plural 
 in form, but either singular or plural in construction ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Put the following words in the plural, and give the rule for 
 forming it; thus, ^' Chair, plural ehairsr Rule, The plural is 
 comSy formed,'' Ac; ">ox, plural /ox«." R. "Nouns m (r, 
 
 Chair, fox, table, cat, dog, horse, house, hand, finger, 
 arm, boy, girl ; dish, church, box, miss, sky, body, key, 
 day, toy, leaf, knife, wife, loaf. An apple (Obs. 8, above) 
 a pear, a cherry, a bush, a church, a bell. 
 
 2. Write or spell the singular of the following plurals, and pre- 
 fix the indefinite article : 
 
 Mies, boxes, leaves, brushes, knives, marshes, bays, 
 tables, bushed, trefes, dogs, ducks, geese, wives, duties, 
 churches, matches, mice, days, keys, staves, horses* 
 mules, cows, sheep, goats, &c. 
 
 8. Tell the plural of the following irregular nouns : 
 Man, woman, child, ox, tooth, foot, goose, penny, 
 mouse ; father-in-law, mother-in-law, court-martial, fish- 
 erman, washerwoman, cousin-german,^&c. 
 
 4. Tell the gender and number of the following nouns; give the 
 plural and the rule for forming it; thus, "House," a noun, neuter, 
 singular ; plural, *' houses." " The plural is commonly formed," Ac 
 
 House, boy, stone, boat, father, king, knife, aont, 
 emperor, governess, pen, lioness, baron, sister, brother, 
 lord, box, bush, rush, goose, bachelor, doe, bride, fiy» 
 
 way, wife, half, fish, table, mother, apple, cherry* star, 
 moon, planet, earth, sky, mountain, river, se% &o. 
 
 planet, 
 B 
 
I 
 
 ■ii. 
 
 I 
 
 18 
 
 INTEODUCTION TO ANAITIIOAL OBAMMAS; 
 
 Lesson 8.~Ca,es of Nmm. 
 [Renew the three preoedtag Lesson,, and answer the questions.J 
 
 ; Case is the state or condition of a noim 
 wx^ respect to the other words in a sentenT 
 
 p.ssfrn^ssLsr^*^''^-^--^-^ 
 
 ^i^^H*^?^*^^^*'^^ case commonly exDresspq 
 
 -«i^® ^*^^<'«»e case denotes the obiect of 
 
 Sr*'?? «';.r«¥io'»; a., James isis?s 
 2%0OTa#; they live in Albany (166) 
 
 are^e.""^^*'''® ^^^ °^j^''*i^« of ^o«na 
 iT. J?® possessive singular is formed by add- 
 
 is S^T^*^ P]^^ ®'''^' ^ *' *^« possessive 
 LS ^ '^^^ "" apostrophe only ; as. 
 
 Kmn. 
 
 1*098, 
 Obj, 
 
 IfOUNS ARE THUS DECLINED ; 
 I^ady Ladie8 John 
 
 I^dy'8 Ladies' John's 
 
 Lady Ladies John 
 
 Proper names generaUy want the plural. 
 
 iM^h^^T^'?'^ '® P^^^d etymologi. 
 caUy, by tellmg its gender, number, and e?e^^/ 
 
 ..^^; K-^J 
 
CASE OV !ffOTn?S« 
 
 10 
 
 thus, Lady's, o, no\m, femmine, inthei)OS- 
 sessive singular. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 1 When the nominative singular ends in »», or letters of a Bim- 
 ilar'sound, the » after the apostrophe is sometimes otnitted, in order 
 to avoid t^ close a succession of hissing sounds ; as, " for goodness 
 sake-" "for conscience' sake." This however is seldom done, unless 
 the wd following begins with s ; thus we do not say " the pnnce 
 feather," but the " prince's feather." , - 
 
 2. Tl^e objective case, with of before it, is ge'^^'^'Wy «^7^^^^^* 
 to tke possessive ; thus, « the rage of the tyrant^ and "the tyrant . 
 rage " mean the same thing. Sometimes, however, the meaning 
 will be diflferent. [See An. & Pr. Gr. 176.] 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is case ? How many cases have nouns ? What ^oes^e 
 nominative case express ?-the possessive ?- he objeoUve ! What 
 ?wo cases are alike ? How i^the possessive singular formed ?-the 
 
 possessive plural f 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Gender t Number ^ and Caee. 
 Parse the following nouns by telling their gender, number wjd 
 caseTthus, " Father,'' a noun, masculine, in the nominative smgu- 
 
 father, mother, slater's husband, brother's fife, un- 
 cle's house, Tom's books, cit y, virtue's reward, brother's 
 
 •In using the above exercises, it will save m«c\ ^ime, whidi 
 is all important, if the pupil be taught to say everj tbmg belong- 
 ing to the noun in the fewest words possible; and al^ay^/^ t^« 
 s^e order as above. For the ^e'eason,thedi8Unctaonof n^^ 
 into proper and common maj ^ omitted. And as person toas 
 nothing to do with the form of a noun, but only with its ««e; and 
 as nouSs are almost always of the third person, the mention of per- 
 son may be omitted, if the teacher chooses ; but when the noun is in 
 the first or the second person, it should be mentioned. It will also 
 be a profitable exercise for him to assign a reason for every part 
 
 object; mofcirfine, because it ^^^o^^^^"'i'f^''u:^^lZ*.At 
 came it denotes but one; ^\xxvo\, fathers. Rule, "The plural is 
 commonly formed by adding « to the singular. n 
 
2^ INTnODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAB. 
 
 widow, Washington the hero, the statesman, the father 
 ot his country ; carpenter, farmer, lawyer's fees, teacher's 
 manual, scholar's assistant, ladies' gloves ; beans, peas, 
 plums, cherries, houses, lands, rivers, mountains, sun 
 moon, stars ; Heaven, earth, sky, &c. 
 
 riteyiew the whole thoroughly from the beginning, aoswerinfr 
 accurately all the queatioos.J "^ "»'^«iing 
 
 ,!/;"("! 
 
 Lesson 9.— The Article, 
 
 An Article is a word put before a noun, 
 to show the manner in which it is used. 
 
 There are two articles, a or an, and the. 
 
 A or an is called the Indefinite Article, 
 because it shows that its noun is used inde- 
 finitely y and not limited to a particular per- 
 son or thing ; as, a king, i. e., any king. 
 ^ The is caUed the Definite article, because 
 it shows that its noun is used definitely, and 
 refers to a particular person or thing ; as, the 
 king, i. e., some particular King, known or 
 described. 
 
 A noun without an Article, is taken in its 
 widest sense; as Man is mortal; i.e., All 
 mankind: Or, in an indefinite sense; as, 
 There are men destitute of all shame, i. e., 
 some men, 
 
 oi^^tZ «Stl92) ^"^ ^^^**^^ ^ "'''"' denoting the species ; as, the 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 i, Ai& used before a consonant; as A hook, a home, a tree. 
 Also, before words beginning with u long, and *w, because they 
 
n, the father 
 
 363, teacher's 
 
 beana, peas, 
 
 mtaina, sun, 
 
 ing, answering 
 
 ^^^f•^r » n 
 
 ,, , ,!jya»>fti:w»- 
 
 JU. 
 
 e a noun, 
 used. 
 
 nd the. 
 
 ? Article, 
 Lsed inde- 
 jular per- 
 Hng. 
 
 , because 
 iielt/, and 
 J ; as, the 
 [nown or 
 
 cen in its 
 i. e., All 
 Qse ; as, 
 me, i. e., 
 
 ecies ; as, the 
 
 , a treei 
 because they 
 
 ■'d 
 
 sound as if beginning with the consonant y; thus, A unit, a me, a 
 ^„/o^y -pronounced as if written, a yunit, a yuse, a yeulogy. 
 
 2. An is used before a vowel or sitent h ; as, An age, an hour. 
 
 3. A or an is used before the singular number only ; th€, before 
 either the singular or the plural. 
 
 Parsing.— The article is parsed by stating 
 whether it is definite or indefinite, and men- 
 tioning' the noun to which it belongs ; thus, 
 
 A book. A is an article, indefinite, and belongs to " booJe» 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is an article ? How many articles are ther«? What U ^ 
 or An called? Why? What is The called? Why! In what 
 sen^ is a noun without an article taken! What is ^ used before? 
 What is An used before ? How is the article parsed ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 la it proper to say a man, or an man ? and why f 
 
 a apple, or an apple? and why? 
 a house, or an house ? and why f 
 a hour, or an hour? and why? 
 
 Prefix the indefinite article in the proper form to the following 
 words: • 
 
 Chair, table, horse, cart, book, house, garden, bird, 
 owl, egg, ear, eye, tree, cow, unit, use, old man, young 
 man, word, book, pot, bench, open waggon, round stone, 
 old hat, penny trumpet, ice house, house, honor, hopeful 
 boy, honest man, &c. See An. & Pr. Gr. 187. 
 
 Correct the followmg errors, and give a reason for the change ; 
 parse the articles. 
 
 An cup, an door, a apple, an pear, an hat, an wig, an 
 eulogy, a honor, an crow, a ostrich, an pen, a ugly beast, 
 
 ^^ ~.»4-4~.r KAoof on nvioffv fViinor. ATI hllfire monst^. a 
 
 upper room, a ice house, an nice house, an shumorouB 
 poem, a open wagon, an hard nut, &c. 
 
til) 
 
 3* nrraoBTCTiON to AirAitrroAii ohammab. 
 Lesson 10.— The Adjective. 
 
 Ak Adjective is a word used to qualify 
 a substantive; as. A good boy ; a square box • 
 fe»doUars. mis poor. To'lieisL/(19?): 
 
 For the word SubstanUTe, see Lesson 4. 
 
 Adjectives denoting number, are called 
 Numeral adjectives. Of these, there are two 
 classes ; the Cardinal, and the Ordinal. 
 
 The Cardinal are one, two, three, &c.. and 
 iTsT &r ^^y-^i^te"^ ^ figures, thus! 
 The Orditial, are first, second, third, &c 
 
 idea of the animal ^o called BuUf 'we wish L Sl^' ^^^^''^ ^>^ 
 out a particular horse more dffini el^a^i 1 r r'^"?l°.'' P^^°* 
 others of the same SDeoiea wf S ^l l^ distinguish it from 
 connect w^th ♦h.TamroTniun TorTi^iV*"""' (^®^>5 '' «" ^« 
 
 «d; as, "a % he- >^ «or;^??!: ^^^J^^ ^own or distinguish- 
 Americal b^3.,» &cf ' WcS5s12flS; fh> ^'"'^ ^orsej^'an 
 A^ecHve., Sometimis severd of Ihfse mav ^P^«^»r^<?Ue<^ 
 same noun; as, when we el^^^iitii^J/t?^ ?^ J°^°®^ ^»'h *he 
 ..A.V. remni stine j-Uhe^J^ oW w^f *'"'* ^°"« '" "^ ««o«'^* 
 
 hTr^r WhiTldnTo/a sl'n^^^^^ WhatkindoTa 
 
 conning the iSl^r'Lte^i^^^^^ "^« ^^^ 
 
 ^Itmay assist the "young beginner" also to r-memW fi... » ^._,i 
 
 say a good thing, a 6ai thing/a^ST/e thiSgf Ar"* ^''*"'' ""^ *^ 
 
THE ADJUOTIVB. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1 Other parts of speech, when used to qualify or limit a noun, 
 or pronoun, perform the part of an adjective, and should be parsed 
 a> Buch ; as, a gold ring, a he bear, the then king, the above remark, 
 
 2 Adjectives are often used as nouns; as, " God rewards the 
 good and punishes the hadP " The virtuous are the most happy. 
 Adjectives thus used are regarded as plural, because they denote 
 more than one. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is an adjective? What are adjectives denoting number 
 caUed? What is a numeral adjective? How maiiy classes of nume- 
 ral adjectives are there ! What are the cardinal numbers f WJai 
 do they express f What( are the ordinal numbers ? What do they 
 exnress ? When do noOns or other parts of speech become adjec- 
 S^s! Are adjectives ever used as nouns ? bf what number are 
 
 they considered ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. In the following Exercise, let the pupil first point out the nouns 
 and then the adjectives; and tell how he knows them to be so. 
 
 A round table, a pretty dog, a little mouse, a low chair, 
 a small book, a sharp knife, white paper, dirty books, ugly 
 face8,a beautiful flower,a rich man,fresh fish,a wild horse, 
 a short man, an old hat, a fierce dog, a good pen, a wise 
 king, an honest man, tame rabbits, a fine day, a sweet 
 apple, a long stick, a little handsome old woman, a thick 
 square book, a large white cat, a new book, a clean white 
 frock, a full cup, an empty mug, a warm room, a wet 
 towel, a cold rainy night, a cloudy sky, wmdy weather, 
 hard frost, deep snow. 
 
 2. In the above Exercises, let the pupil take each nonn and pre- 
 fix to it as many adjectives as he can think of, so as to make sense ; 
 as, for example, *' table," high table, low table, /on^ table, &c., Ac, 
 and in reciting put the emphasis on the adjective. 
 
 8. Let him take each adjective, and add to it as many nojnj aa 
 he can think of, so as to make sense ; as, " round," a round 6«rf/, ft 
 round hole, a round hvuw^ a round calce, Ac., and put the emphasis 
 on the noon. 
 
 
24k 
 
 INIEODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAE. 
 
 
 Lesson 11.— Comparison of Adjectives. 
 [Review the piecediBg Lesson, and answer the questions.] 
 
 Adjectives for the most part have three 
 torms, called degrees of comparison ; the 
 eosihve. Comparative, and Superlative. 
 
 The Potitim expresses the quality simply • 
 ob^et tTiltZST^'^'^ "" l"""'^ '» » "'S''" ''^g'- i» one 
 
 r,n;t?^^''*i.''^'i'!.°''^'y^^^l«'f«^m the com- 
 parative by adding er to the positive; and 
 the superlative, by adding est; as sxoeet, 
 sweeter, sweetest. ' 
 
 Adjectives ending in e mute, drop e before 
 er and est ; as, large, larger, largest (68) 
 
 Adjectives of more than one syllable are 
 commonly compared by prefixing more and 
 
 fit, <tc. prenxing mow and moti; as, more »«««, moU 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Dissyllables in U after a mute, are generally compared by et 
 
 into, before «• and «<; as, dry, dntr, drie,: ; uZy, k„J„ 
 happ.„t. Bnty with a vowel before it i, not ehaS- aTlv 
 gayer ygaye&t. "»"Seu, as, ^ay, 
 
 2. Some adjectives form fhft «n««»i„*:„« u_ ...i, . . . 
 pnH nf w/^«^„" i---x«..xTc wj, ciuuing »i(>«f lo the 
 
MMAE. 
 
 stives. 
 questions.] 
 
 lave three 
 Lson; the 
 ative. 
 
 f degree in one 
 best degree in 
 
 the com- 
 ive; and 
 as stoeet, 
 
 > e before 
 ^t (68). 
 
 lable are 
 wre and 
 ^ul, most 
 
 3tives of two 
 our tenderest 
 le are some* 
 'e wisef mo»t 
 
 pared by er 
 I is changed 
 >y» happier, 
 Bd ; as, ffay, 
 
 i'/iosi to the 
 wostf hind- 
 
 OOMPABISON or ADJECTIVES. 
 
 25 
 
 •f 
 
 8 When the positive ends in a simple consonant preceded by a 
 single vowel, the consonant is doubled before er and est ; as, hot, 
 
 hotter, hottest (60). 
 4. Some adjectives do not admit of comparison viz : 
 Ist Such as denote nwrn6<?r ; as, one, two; third, fourth. 
 
 2d . . .Jigureov shape: VLB, circular, square. 
 
 gj* ^posture or position; as, perpendicular, 
 
 horizontal. , , 
 
 4th. Those of an absolute or superlative signification ; as, true, 
 
 perfect, universal, chief, extreme, &c. (224). 
 6. Seme adjectives are compared irregularly, as follows : 
 ADJECTIYES OOMPAEED lEBEGTJLARLY. 
 
 Positive. 
 Good 
 
 Bad, evil or ill 
 Little 
 
 Much or many 
 Late 
 Near 
 Far 
 Fore 
 Old 
 
 Comparative. 
 better 
 worse 
 less 
 more 
 later 
 nearer 
 farther 
 former 
 
 Superlative* 
 best 
 worst 
 least 
 most 
 
 latest Of last 
 nearest or next 
 farthest 
 
 foremost or first 
 oldest or eldest 
 
 older or elder 
 6. Much is applied to things weighed or measured; many to those 
 that are numbered. Mder and eldest are applied to persons only ; 
 older and oldest to either persons or things. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 How many degrees of comparison are there ! What does the 
 positive denote?— the comparative ?--the superlative? How are 
 monosyllables compared ?— words of more than one syllable <-- 
 dissyllables in /c after a mute?— in y after a consonaatf What 
 sort of adjectives double the final consonant before er and estf 
 What adjectives are not compared ? What adjectives ar6 com- 
 pared irregularly ? 
 
 Parsing.— Adjectives are parsed by stat- 
 ing their class (if numerals), the degree of 
 coniparisoii, anu ints nouub vviiiv;ii j>ii^^. 
 
 qufijily. ; 
 
 G 
 
m If! 
 
 26 INTEODIJOTION TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAE. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Point out the <i(fyw</«M in the following Exercise; parse them- 
 comparejthem; thus, a good father ; " Good/' an ad& ve p^^^ 
 
 degree, qualifies •. father » compared irregularly, ^r^r^^^^^^^^ 
 
 2. Point out the nouns, and parse them by telling their cender 
 
 A good father, a wiser man, a more beautiful ffirL wild 
 horses young colts, a sweeter apple, the wisest prince, 
 green trees, the honest farmers, the most virtuous people 
 the richer tradesman, the better scholar, the tallest girl 
 the finer sheep, large oranges, the merriest fellows, the 
 old soldier, pretty dogs, an ugly calf, the tamest rabbits, 
 the little mouse, the longest stick, a wider table, a most 
 ardir ' ^^g^e&t house, the most fruitful 
 
 \ NuMEEALs.—Four men, the fourth day, six days, the 
 Beventh day, 365 days, ten horses, the first time?-.of 
 four houses, the first is of wood ; the second, of stone ; 
 the third and fourth, of brick. ' 
 
 4. In both exercises, change singular nouns into plural, and plural 
 
 TcZ^^^a' ;r' '^%r^' ^""A" P^"'^'^' ^°^ ^^^^ read the pS 
 ?«^^T 'a}^^' -^f^l^' V}' fathers. ^ The plural is oonSionly 
 formed by adding a to the singular," good fathers. 
 
 Iiessoxi 12.— PronoMJw. 
 [Review the two preceding Lessons, and answer the questions] 
 
 A Pkonoun is a word used instead of a 
 noun ; as, John is a good boy ; he is diKeent 
 in his studies. 
 
 Pronouns may be divided into four classes ; 
 Personal, EelatJ/ce, Interrogative, and Ad- 
 jective. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION.— Pronouns are used simply to avoid the 
 too frequent and oonsequenUy disagreeable repetition of the 
 
jxercise, Lesson 
 
 PEBSONAIi PBONotNS. 
 
 27 
 
 r v,VK thpv Btand Thus, instead of B&yiug,^John!pBla, 
 nouns for which they Btana. ^"" ' , gtu^i^s; we nse the {pro- 
 
 rl1U^^US"a Crrr?rr<.ouMto.hatnou.a 
 
 "XTo^'ltaes of pronoun. «r. used in different ,ay„ ns will 
 be seen under each. -..-ij.* ^^A 
 
 The Accidents of Personal, Uelative, and 
 Interrogative pronouns, like nouns, are Per- 
 son, Oender, Number, and Case. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Personal Pronouns are those which dis- 
 tinguish the person by their form. They 
 are either simple or compound, 
 
 1 The simple personal pronouns are J, 
 tho^, he, she, it; with their plurals, we, ye 
 or you, they. 
 
 I is of the first person, and denotes the speaker. 
 
 Thau is of the second person, and denotes the person addremd^ 
 
 J3#, she, it, are of the third person, and denote the person or thing 
 
 '^°The personal pronouns are thus declined: 
 
 ■W%-TTfW> »T.. 
 
 1. m.oxf. 
 
 2. m. or/. 
 S. masc. 
 8. fem. 
 
 3. neut. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N(m. Poss. 
 
 I 
 
 Thou 
 He 
 
 She 
 It 
 
 mine 
 
 thine 
 
 his 
 
 hers 
 
 its 
 
 Obj. 
 me 
 thee 
 him 
 her 
 it 
 
 Nom. 
 We 
 You 
 They 
 They 
 They 
 
 PLUBAL. 
 
 Poss. 
 ours 
 yours 
 theirs 
 theirs 
 theirs 
 
 06j. 
 
 us 
 
 you 
 
 them 
 
 them 
 
 them 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. In proclamations, charters, editorial articles, and the like, roe 
 
 is frequently applied to one person, ^ v .i. * *i,. a\r^ 
 
 2. In addressing persons, y<m is commonly put bothjor the sin- 
 gular and the plural, and has always a plural verb. Thou u usea 
 only in addresses to the Deity, or any important object m nature; 
 
I **y*'' 
 
 ■'tiiliif 
 
 ,1 ■ 
 
 OT IKTEODXTOTIOM" TO ANALYTICAL (lEAMMAE. 
 
 or to mark special emphaais ; or, in the language of contempt. 
 The plural form, ye, is now but seldom used. 
 
 8. The pronoun it, besides its use as the neuter pronoun of the 
 third person, is also used indefinitely with the verb to he in the third 
 person singular, for all genders, numbers, and persons; as, it i%I^ 
 it t» we, it is you, it is they ; It was she, <fec. 
 
 4. The possessive case of the pronoun cannot, like the possessive 
 of the nouD, be followed by the name of the thing pessessed. Thus, 
 we can say, Mary's book, but not " hers book ;" and yet we can say 
 equally well, « It is Mary's," or, « it is hers." In both these last ex- 
 pressions, the name of the thing possessed is not expressed but im- 
 plied. [See An. & Pr. Gr. 241.] 
 
 6. ITers, its, ours, yours, theirs, should never be written her\ it's, 
 our's, your's, theirs. 
 
 2. The compound personal pronouns are 
 Myself, thtjself, himself, herself itself; with 
 their plurals, ourselves^yourselves, themselves. 
 
 These pronouns are used, without change of form, in the nomi- 
 native and the objective case. In the nominative they are emphatic, 
 and are added to their respective personal pronouns or nouns, or 
 are used instead of them; as, "Iwyse// did it; « ^imwl/ shall 
 come." In the objective, they are reflexive, showing that the agent 
 is also the object of his own act ; as, "Judas went and hanged him- 
 •el/:* Ourself and yourself are used as compounds corresponding 
 to we and you applied to individuals; as, " We owrw//' will follow." 
 *• You must do it yourself." 
 
 Parsing. — ^The personal pronoun may he 
 parsed briefly thus : Jis a pronoun of the 
 first person, masculine for feminine) in the 
 nominative singular. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 Ttru.i. :» - - a »T ... 
 
 TT^:. « a pruuuuu! 0.0^ ai'e monouos divided? What is a 
 personal pronoun f Why is it calleS personal ? What are they f 
 j;)eclme the first— the second— the third. Of what person is i/— 
 
PEONOUNS. 
 
 29 
 
 uage of contempt. 
 
 written /t«r'», «<'#, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 3. Go over the Mowing «st of ^P^^^^^^^^^^ T^if ^12'^ 
 r^fag^^ia Sfth'eli TZVA4 tell their .«.*r. 
 nMm6«r, and case, together. 
 
 T T«o fViPm US we, thou, thine, ye, oura, jfuuxo. 
 skryou^eC, herselt; themselve., oumlf, yourself. 
 
 itself. _ . ^.„. 
 
 2 Point out the pronouns in the '»«<>^»? ^fXa '^^e" 
 
 ii»?sdrsse«nTe'^^:»* -'■ 
 
 8. Point out the ««.«. and parse them; the ««««.« aod para. 
 
 them. Compare them. 
 
 4. Read over each sentence, -g^^tel^:^^^t^^^^^ 
 stands for; thus, me stands for the speaker, you v 
 
 spoken to, &c. 
 
 Gwe me the pears you bought of him ; I l'k« t^«"l^«*- 
 ter than the apple he bought ; it ^«« ^°"p J^^ *f^ 
 what we said to her. and they heard ^er. J"* i* "".^ 
 vou? He likes them because th^ are sweet. Take teem 
 tn Johi I save them to her. We will do it, if you wish. 
 
 The m^; saifthey would do \^^%^tzt Y^t 
 not know them. The boy thought he knew them. Xou 
 
 and I went with them to meet her »"«' *« Mf^" 
 Sn. He and I can do it. though you ^^^^X^^ 
 bought that book i it is therefore his, and not he|^ 
 
 "Eemember thy Creator in the days of thy youth." 
 «HoShy Wand thy mother, tta' % <ky^^7 
 brtonjt in the land which the Lord thy <Jod giveth 
 thee?" <V^s ye would that others should do to you, do 
 ye even bo to them.* 
 
 6. Take an easy reading lesson, and go over it in the same way. 
 0* 
 
80 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL OEAMMAE. 
 
 
 Lesson 13.— Relative Pronouns. 
 [Review the preceding Lesson, and answer the queitions.] 
 
 1. A R ELATivE Pronoun is one that relates 
 to, and connects its clause with, a noun or 
 
 L'Tr ^^^T '\'^^^^^ *^^ mtecedent; 
 as, ' 1 he master ^l?^o taught us " 
 
 The boy who reads ; 
 
 /r« who does well will be rewarded j 
 
 J'amu M ncic, which accounte for his absence. 
 
 2. The relative pronouns are who, which, 
 thai, and what. Who and which aie aS 
 m both numbers ; and are thus decUned : 
 
 Norn. ««?-»d^'"r«;. Sir^^i Plural. 
 
 Pom wi W'''<* 
 
 «Aore^s':''*^^^'''^*°P''''°'' as, the boy 
 
 «e^™^rri:dt;^:.sj^:!rctir^^^^^^ '-^ 
 
 *«t+i,^'^^* is applied to mferior animals, 
 and thrnp without Ufe ; as, the dog wZk 
 barks ; the book which was lost • 
 
 of^„^,S'chT"t'r"Tw'is'c^»<''frr.' -^"'Jf «-"." 
 
 name of a person used mprSv«a « J ^"1 likewise after the 
 
 ^be^.^wMch7^pri:?:aa-r^^^ 
 
 5. 2%a^isoften used as a relative, instead 
 Tii.-r^Tu 7, T'"^'*- ^^ is maecimabie, and ap- 
 plied both to persons and things. ^ 
 
 ^1 
 
IITTBEBOQATIVE PE03I0UNS. 
 
 81 
 
 ID ; eometimes a 
 
 6. What is applied to things only, and i8 
 never used but when the antecedent is onut- 
 ted; as, *'This is what I wanted == that 
 which I wanted. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVE. 
 1. The office of the relative is twofold.-lBt It is used to connect 
 
 its clause with the antecedent for the purpose of ^l^^^^^ ^'l'^'^^ 
 it Thus used, it is said to be additive; as, <' Light is a body «,A.cA 
 move, with great celerity' Wni it moves, fo, 2d. It is used to 
 connect its luse with the antecedent for t^e purpose of bmiing 
 or restricting it like an adjective or adjunct. Thus used, it is sa^ 
 to be restrLive as, "The man toAo « i^ooi is happy"-.The good 
 
 "^"'^^ZfS^^^^^ ^natever, and roHatsoever, are -d ^ 
 compound relatives, and are equivalent to the rela ive and a gene- 
 rXor indefinite antecedent; as, '« Whosoever committeth sm. is the 
 
 servantof sin" that is, "any one," or '' ^'^y ^^^^r!"' Z2m1 
 8in,>' Ac ^^ Whatsoever things are of good report;" i.e. "^««^»»^* 
 (without exception) which are of good report. [See An. & Pr. 
 
 ^'s.'' TfLa and v>hat are sometimes used as adjectives, and have a 
 nomi following them; as, "Tell me what books you are reading; 
 .. Which things are an allegory." In this sense, which applies either 
 to persons or things, and in meaning is equivalent to^^.s or these. 
 4. Who, and also which and what, without a noun following, are 
 sometimes used as indefinite pronouns; as. I do not know who wiU 
 be our next President. 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns, 
 
 Who, which, and what, when used in ask- 
 ing questions, are called Interrogative 
 pronouns. 
 
 As interrogatives, who is applied to per- 
 sons only ; which and what, either to persoixS 
 or things. What is indeclma;ble. . 
 
I i 
 
 ■im 
 
 K- 
 
 
 ;[i 
 
 11 It 
 
 82 
 
 IMBODtrCTION TO ANALTIIOAL OBAMMAR. 
 
 ^ 
 
 «.I^^^' ^''^^' ^""^ '''^«^' "sed responsiyely, 
 
 in Jlt^^'''^-~"^^^ f ^^*^^« ^s parsed by Stat, 
 mg Its gender, number, case, a^d antecedent • 
 (the gender and number being always the 
 same as thnsR of +i.» »„+ J._P^ f^^'^J^ »^e 
 
 in the 
 OB us anteoedent. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What ie „A,oA appuTto'f WhTil /»3 "' J' "*" fPP'''-^ *»» 
 what is it aonlieSV Wh.t . * ^ " , '. "''^ "^ » re afive » To 
 
 the gender an§ oSo^'of ^'K^own r''°"'' ' ^"^ "^ 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1. Is it proper to say-the man who, or the man which t why 1 
 
 the dog who, or the dog which ? whv? 
 
 the tree who, or the tree which ? wh» 
 2IotI,.f„n • *'"^*""'y»'">.»tl'efemllywhioh(why 
 
 sJ;nd?^LVrdrii''''(S'S^,'?'J«3f;'-tencennthe 
 
 itt ?°r\^?'?«°'''erthe man whom we mi?f ifc 
 
 l^A^t^ I' T- " ^''^ '«dy who has been kind to ns 
 
 ^iT''i^1?-^i" ?^«'.°P«" to the poor. It is^he Ch 
 -- v«« uiiigcai, cnat maketh rich. He thnf mV^fU 4.« iiT" 
 poor lendeth to the Lord. The tem^kwl^att 
 
 ■■ii'4lM»ll 
 
 
I aBAMMAR. 
 
 1 responsively, 
 " I know who 
 
 arsed by stat- 
 id antecedent; 
 ig always the 
 t) thus : 
 
 in, masculine, in the 
 antecedent. 
 
 rord to which it re- 
 • relative pronoun? 
 3 who apph'ed tot 
 as a relative % To 
 vshatf What does 
 tfec. f When which 
 f speech are they f 
 e they called inter- 
 plied to ?—wAecA/ 
 tioned ? How are 
 
 a which ? why ? 
 which ? -why % 
 3 which ? why ? 
 nily which? why? 
 relative, and the 
 
 sentence? in the 
 
 love the man 
 deals in false- 
 emet? There 
 ime book that 
 en kind to us, 
 [t is the hand 
 i giveth to the 
 bich Solomon 
 
 ADJIBOTIVB PROKOTJNB. 
 
 built Who gave you that book, wbicb you prize so 
 S? Whifh bouse is yours? He wbo preserves 
 r, to wbom I owe my being, wbose I am, and whom I 
 serve, is eternal. 
 
 Lesson lA^—Adjective Pronouns. 
 [Review the two preceding Lessons, and answer the questions.] 
 
 There are four sorts of Adjective pro- 
 nouns; viz., the Possessive, Distributive, 
 Damonstrativey and Indefinite. 
 
 1 The Possessive pronouns are such as 
 denote possession. They are my, thy, his, 
 her, our, your, their, its, own, 
 
 2 The Bistrihutive pronouns represent 
 obiects as taken separately. They are each, 
 every, either, neither. (See An. & Pr. trr, 
 
 297-301). . ^ . 
 
 3. The Demonstrative pronouns point out 
 objects definitely. They are this and that, 
 with their plurals, these and those, 
 
 4. The Indefinite pronouns denote persons 
 or things indefinitely. They are none, any, 
 all, such, whole, some, both, one, other. iJie 
 two last are declined like nouns. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. These pronouns are called arf;>c<iDe, because, like adjectives, 
 they either are, or may be, followed by a noun which they qualify 
 
 or Umit. 
 
 2. Possessive nronouns have the same meaning as the possessive 
 case of the personal pronouns to which they relate, but are used 
 diflferently. The possessive pronoun must always have a noun 
 
m 
 
 INTBODUOTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAE. 
 
 «;i 
 
 \im 
 
 after it, the possessive case of the peMonal, never, as it always 
 refers to a noun previously expressed ; thus, 
 
 Possessive Pronoun, Possessive Case. 
 
 This is my book ; This book is mine. 
 
 That 18 her pen ; That pen is hers. 
 
 This is your hat ; This hat is yours. 
 
 It is their house ; The house is theirs. 
 
 NaTE.-.Ou,n is added to another possessive to make it emphatic : 
 as, my own," « their own," " the boy's own book." 
 
 B,ms and A^, followed by a noun, are possessive pronouns; 
 not followed by a noun, they are personal pronouns. 
 
 4. TTtat is sometimes a demonstrative, sometimes a relative, and 
 sometimes a conjunction ; thus, 
 Dem. That book is mine. 
 Hel, It is the same that I bought 
 Conj. I read, that I may learn. 
 
 6. Among indefinites may also be reckoned such words as no 
 few, many several, and the like;-the compounds whoever, u,hat~ 
 
 7eli^{n^^^^^ '^'" ^""^ ''^''' "'^''^' ^°^ "'*'''• '° responsive sen- 
 
 6. None is used in both numbers; but it cannot be joined to a 
 noun. •' 
 
 Parsing.— Adjective pronouns are parsed 
 by stating their class, and the word which 
 they qualify; thus, 
 
 fies ^book?!"'" ^^ " * possessive adjective ptonoun ; and quali. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 How many sorts of adjective pronouns are there ? Name them 
 
 l^.t:if^'''^' P'^°""°^^ ^*»»* " « possessiveTr^nouTi 
 N^e S^nT n'""^ VronoxiT^B. What is a distributive proSoun 
 JXame them— A demonstrative pronoun ? Name them— An inrlifi 
 mte pronoun? Name them. In what are poL^Live V^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 useS? wL^'^%"" '^r.P^^ ^^*^« ^^ ^^^^^' How is 'W 
 used ? Whenare Ai« and her possessives ?-wh«n D«r««noTo » ?. 
 
 How are adjective pronouns parsed ? 
 
lMMAB. 
 
 er. ae it always 
 
 Case. 
 is mine. 
 8 hers, 
 yours. 
 Is theirs. 
 
 ke it emphatic ; 
 
 3ive pronouns; 
 
 I. 
 
 a relative, and 
 
 words as no, 
 ohoever, tehat- 
 Bsponsive sen- 
 
 i)e joined to a 
 
 re parsed 
 rd which 
 
 1 ; and qaali- 
 
 Name them, 
 ^■e pronoun 9 
 ve pronoun ? 
 :— An indefi- 
 )ronouns and 
 lu whal do 
 ow is ** own** 
 
 •flnnola 9 T^ 
 ,..,„ J _.j^ 
 
 tone'* medl 
 
 PE0N0TJ5B.— OENEEAL BXEE0I8B3. 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 35 
 
 1 In the following Exercise, point out the adjective pronouns, 
 and parse them ; the nouus, aud parse Ihem : 
 
 My book, her shoes, your horse, t^«!r/^*HSt^?«^!?; 
 ther, every hour, that table, these S^^^^^; , ^,*^p^^ '^.^^ 
 book • that book is yours. Where is my hat ? These 
 *nnlea are ffood ; ffive some to your brothers. I will 
 Soneto'"^^ 'l have given th'em all away, eve^ one 
 Sverv day try to do good to some person. This book 
 wm Wwell as that one. Every boy should keep his 
 Twn books. Do good to all men-mjury to none. 
 
 Lesson Ib.—JExerdses on Nouns, Articles, Adjectives, 
 
 and Pronottns* 
 
 them;— the pronouns, and parse them: 
 
 I found my hat upon your table ; but where ia yours ? 
 Who put that glove £i my cap ? Have you seen the book 
 S^my failer gave 'to me? That rod « your, is 
 longer than mine, but not so long as John s. Those 
 trets have lost their leaves. Everjr book on that shelf 
 is mine; I will give you a list of them. Keep this knife 
 for my sake ; i| is a good one. All men are morta^ ; 
 time waits for no one; a wise man will improve every 
 moment to some useful purpose. An idle man will come 
 to poverty ; but he that is diUigent mcreases his store. 
 They that walk with the wise shall be wise ; but a com- 
 panion of fools shall be destroyed. Give to him that 
 asketh thee, and from him that would borrow of thee, 
 turn not thou away. 
 
 [1. Review thoroughly from Lesson 10, answering promptly and 
 
 accurately all the questions. ,i ., j c • 
 
 - « -_• r. iu^ \.^ir,nir^t* vM*it\nff accuratelv all the aemu- 
 
 to ^rr:i«:i;nr.;;;;i^Dg ttV qu7eti«n,. This m.y reqnire 
 two or three recitations.] 
 
36 
 
 INTBODUOTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAE. 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
 Lesson IQ,— Verh'. 
 
 1. A Verb is a word used to express the 
 act.being, ov state of its subject ; as, I write; 
 he t8 ; time Jlies. 
 
 2. Verbs are of two kinds ; Transitive and 
 Intransitive, 
 
 3. A Transitive Verb expresses an act 
 done by one person or thing to another: as, 
 James strikes the table; The table is struck 
 by James. 
 
 4. An Intransitive Verb expresses the 
 being OT state of its subject, or an act not 
 done to another ; as, I am, he sleeps, you run. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 1. The use of the verb in simple sentences is, to affirm or deelarei 
 
 2. Tranuthe verbs include all those which express an aet that 
 
 Here, ^. ,8 the actor, «';ot;«» expresses the act, and «*, the ob- 
 jeet loved, or acted upon. The same thing can be expr ssed by 
 anoU^er form ; thus. " We are loved by him." Of these two forms 
 of the verb, the first is called the active voice, and the second,™! 
 passive voice. -"^uu, mty 
 
 Intramitive verbs include all y«be not tranritive, whether ftef' 
 «p«sa a^Uoa or not; and they have only one form. namety.S 
 of the active vo.ce; a,. I am; you «ali; they run. A few h.v» 
 the p«8,ve form, but the sense is the same in both j as, "Um ««n.» 
 and, "I have come." • 
 
 8. Intransitive verbs are sometimes rendered transitive, by add- 
 mg a noun of the same, or similar signification with themselves, as 
 
 tixus, intrausitlye, I run; trinsitlve, 1 run a race. 
 
 ' - - * '- '•- "<«• * V) A. # c*T* u race. 
 
 4. Ihe same verba are used sometimes iu a transitive, and aome^ 
 
TEBBS. 
 
 37 
 
 timw In an intransitive senBe; thus, transitive, "Charity thiukelk 
 no evil;" intransitive, ''Think on me." 
 
 6. Transitive and intransitive verba maybe distinguished by the 
 
 sense, as follows : . i * 
 
 1st. A transitive active verb requires an object after it to complete 
 the sense ; as, The boy studies grammar. An intransitive verb 
 requires no object after it, but the sense is complete without It; 
 as, He ait», you ride. 
 
 2d. Every transitive active verb can be changed into the passive 
 form; thus, "James strikes the table," can be changed into "The 
 table is struck by James." But the intransitive verb can not be 
 so changed ; thus, I tmile, can not be changed into I am amited. 
 
 8d. In the use of the transitive verb, there are always three things 
 implied ; the aetor, the act, and the object acted upon. In the 
 use of the intransitive, there are only <ioo— the aubjeet or thing 
 spoken of, and the state or action attributed to it, 
 
 ILLUSTRATION.— The verb is the most important part of 
 speech. It is a necessary word in every sentence. Without it, we 
 can neither aflSrm nor deny, nor express any fact or thought. It 
 was therefore called the Verb, that is, the toord, by way of emi- 
 nence, or of all others the most important. As we wish to express 
 an act or state in a great variety of ways ; as present, past, future, 
 actual, contingent, conditional, <tc., so there is a great variety of 
 forms assumed by the verb in order to express these things. It is, 
 therefore, very necessary for the pupil to be well acquainted with 
 this part of speech. At this stage, two things must be attended to ; 
 both of them very important. 
 
 1. The first thinsr is, to distinguish the verb from every other 
 part of speech. This can easily be done, if the pupil will only 
 remember that every word that tells us what a person or thing^ 
 does, or what is done to a person or thing, is a verb. Thus, when 
 we say, " John writes ;" " the boys study ;" " the dog was killed ;"" 
 we know that ** writes" is a verb, because it tells us what " John'^ 
 does ; that " study" is a verb, because it tells us what " the boys'" 
 do ; and that " was killed" is a verb, because it tells us what waa 
 done to " the dog ;'' and so of others. 
 
 2. The second thing is, to know when a verb is transitive, and 
 when intransitive. Now, when the verb tells what one person or 
 thing does to another, or what is done to dne person or thing by 
 another, the verb is transitive. Thus, when it is said, "James eats 
 apples :" we know, first, that " *a<«" is a verb, because it tells 
 what James does; and secondly, that it is transitive, because it 
 tells what James does to the apples. 
 
4 
 
 38 INTBODUOTION TO ANALYTICAL GRAMMAH. 
 
 oth^erV'rtVo^'kT^^^^^^^^ il-t done to ao^ 
 
 tence, ^. James runs? we kBo^tha^^^^^^^^^ ^^"\^° ^'^^ ««°- 
 
 tells what Jaraee (/o./andZf if • -T *.^a ^erb, because it 
 James does is notto^ tol^^lfr iV^oT^^ ^^ ^^^t 
 3. Verbs that denote merely to 6e or e.ist, are always intransitive. 
 . QUESTIONS. 
 
 is a t?ati^i:7::^b^ f-anis;iiTr wh^^^^^ r *^^^^ ' ^^*t 
 
 in simple sentences ? What?« h J k- .^^^ '' '^^ "«« ^^ 'he verb 
 
 the transitive verb?-the nt Se r HowT ""^"^ ^^^°"« ^'^^ 
 word in a sentence is a yevhi ml a t^ ^"^^ know which 
 
 transitive or intransitive ? '^'' ^^^ ^"^'^ ""^"^^^^^ it is 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 It tells what « boys" do to lessons- "r,-i?o'»- • ^^^^jt'^e. because 
 
 what ... „.„- jes. is noe'arti .:^ytc;^z':r&j^''- 
 
 drink water. I can rirlo ™=li a j ." ■'"ecows 
 health. That man wa7t, fif A ""^® '?!"''"'«« *''» 
 I love her and y"u! " "^ '""^ walk tires me. 
 
 together a. one word ' "" '"" "■"« *'« "'"^y pawed 
 
 I taill water the earden Ttimao — -^ ■ 
 
 Tou may ride on my horse kT f •?, ""** " '^"«■•• 
 Tou Yes hn w,?^ „• ^o''«''' will give a book to 
 
 bought him John t.l^f k u '^ *"' ''°"«- I have 
 ha J Med it hi:'" \'"!.''. y°"f, '-:°»'- He *Ao„;rf 
 letter before ni.hr-ff^ """rate'^AtritS/' 
 
DIVISION or VEEBS. 
 
 89 
 
 ajs intransitive. 
 
 Lesson 17. — Division of Verbs, 
 [Review thoroughly the preceding Lesson.] 
 
 1. In respect of form, verbs are divided 
 into Begular, Irregular, and Defective. 
 
 2. A Regular Verb is one that forms its 
 Past tense in the Indicative active, and its 
 Past participle by adding ed to the Present ; 
 as. Present, act; Past, acted; Past parti- 
 ciple, acted. 
 
 Verbs ending in « mute drop e before ed; as, love, loved, loved. 
 
 3. An Irregular Verb is one that does 
 not form its Past tense in the Indicative ac- 
 tive, and its Past participle by adding ed to 
 the Present; as, Present, write; Past, wrote; 
 Past participle, written. 
 
 A Defective Verb is one in which some 
 of the parts are wanting. To this class be- 
 long chiefly Auxiliary and Impersonal verbs. 
 
 auxiliary verbs. 
 
 The Auxiliary, or helping verbs, are those 
 by the help of which verbs are inflected. 
 They are the following, which, as auxili- 
 aries, are used only in the present and the 
 past tense, \iz. : 
 
 Pres Do, have, shall, TviU, may, can, am, must. 
 Pmt Did, had, should, would, might, could, was, -— . 
 
 The verb to be is used as an auxiliary in 
 
 aii its iCiiO^ia. ^ 
 
 Be, do, and have, are also principal verbs. 
 

 40 INTBODUOTION TO ANALYTICAL GRAMMAB. 
 
 OBSERYATIONS. 
 
 1. 'I^e auxiliary (or helping) verbs are 80 called, because, by their 
 help, the verb is enabled to express varieties of time and manner 
 of acting or being, which it could not do without them. The auxi 
 hary always stands before its verb, and the two are regarded in 
 parsing as one word; as, I will write, he hai written, we may writeM. 
 2. Of the auxiliaries, shall implies duty or obligation ; will pur- 
 pose or resolution ; may, liberty ; can, ability. The past teise of 
 these verbs is should, would, might, could; but still they exnress 
 time very indefinitely. ^ ^^^^ 
 
 8. In affirmative sentences, will, in the first person, intimates 
 resolution and promising ; as, '• I will go ;" in the second and third. 
 It commonly foretells ; as, " You will be happy." 
 
 Shall, in the first person, only foretells; as, " I shall go to-mor 
 row ;"-iD the second and third, it promises, commands, or threat- 
 ens, as, "Thou Shalt not steal" (386--844). 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 How are verbs divided in respect of form ? What is a regular 
 verb f-an irregular verb ?~a defective verb f What «? thi 
 Fincipal defective verbs? Why are auxiliary verL so c^ledl 
 What verbs are principal verbs as well as ai^iliary ? How are 
 the auxiliaries shall and will distinguished ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 paJtic^ple?" ^^"^^'"^ '"S*^^*^ ^«rb« »°to the Past tense and Past 
 
 r.1^^1' ^?''®' ^?^' ^°??.' ^^°^' ^^*^°' '"ove. wash, clean, 
 walk, desire, return oblige, form, force, punish, support 
 turn, touch, disturb, place, try, deny, cry, delay. ^ 
 
 PrLS'r"^^ *^^ following verbs from the Past tense into the 
 
 Marked, protected, composed, favored, turned, hated, 
 mixed, believed, wounded, rushed, preached, hunted 
 crushed, warned, pleaded, loved, ended. ' 
 
 are ir^^trt a^d ';iiy!^ *^" "'^°' "^^^ ^'^ '^o-Ur, and which 
 
 .'•i'il,'! 
 
tense and Paafc 
 
 lar, and which 
 
 Present. 
 Spoil 
 Go 
 Take 
 Write 
 Hope 
 Bun 
 Freeze 
 Spy 
 Obey 
 
 INFLECTIOK OF TEEBS. 
 
 Pant. 
 spoiled 
 went 
 took 
 wrote 
 hoped 
 ran 
 froze 
 spied 
 obeyed 
 
 41 
 
 Pant Participle. 
 spoiled 
 gone 
 taken 
 written 
 hoped 
 run 
 frozen 
 spied 
 obeyed 
 
 Lesson IQ,— Inflection of Verba, 
 [Review the two preceding Lessons.] 
 
 The Accidents of Verbs are Voices, Moods, 
 Tensesy Numbers, and Fersons ;— also Par- 
 ticiples. 
 
 OF VOICE. 
 
 Voice is a particular form of the verb, 
 which shows the relation of the subject, or 
 thing spoken of, to the action expressed by 
 
 the verb * 
 
 Transitive verbs have two voices, called 
 
 the Active and the Passive. 
 
 1. The Active Voice represents the sub- 
 jectof the verb as acting upon some object ; 
 as, James strikes the table. 
 
 Here the verb « Urikes," in the active voice, indicates what its 
 subject^ " Jamei,'* does to the object, table, > 
 
 2. The Passive Voice represents the sub- 
 ject of the verb as acted upon by some per- 
 son or thing ; as. The table is struck by 
 
 
 Here the verb, "is struck^ in the passive voice, indicates what 
 is done to the subject, " table," by James. 
 
« llTTItODTJOTION TO ANAlTTIOAt 8BAMMAB. 
 
 3. Intransitive verbs hare not a passive 
 voice. A few admit a passive form, but not 
 a passive sense ; thus, I am come, means the 
 same thing as, I have come. 
 
 r.hJl^^'':^- ""^r^ ""'^^^^y intransitive, is 
 made transitive [Lesson 16, Obs. 3,1 it h 
 
 then capable of a passive voice ; as, « Mv 
 race is run." ' ■^' 
 
 «.« «cfi« voice, tLTbjeoc that i8 S. n.™ ^'""^^^ "^^^ "^'^ 
 does the act, or is active -with til P'"°" t' """8 'Poken of. 
 acted upon, or is iaML'Thii,^ pafsive voice, the subject is 
 belong to t^iesuCt but art n T'""^"^ '■'''"•''' '''™ «rfetl7 
 
 acted upon : that is, the form of .1.. tl.K k-*^ '"''J°"=' *«'» «»■ » 
 jeot M a'ctive, is called the ^(I'l^*!::'''"^-^^^^^^^ if ««b. 
 •es subject as passive, is calfed the Pa«-rvoice '^'''' "^"^''*' 
 
 *k^T^trtli:t^^^l}':»f - ""--'-o of a verb is 
 thatlbject acft "werow that' Ae v^ biM^ Z'Tf^'- "'■"* P" 
 ^hcD we say. - 0»s.r conquered Gaul » we s^e Ct'- r°"" ' .?r 
 person spoken of. is reD?Men..,1 „. T- . Ceesar," the 
 
 QtJESTIOlfS. 
 
 «o.^*''H.w"S.n': voUfr''".'!.'''.™''''' ^' i' -««nt by 
 mat arXyT'C'does th'o actlvl""''"'" ^*''' " ^°«''»^^ 
 How.does th.%asS™voi« represent uf ■SFr'".''' 1""^^^ ' 
 transitive verbs J Have thLTl '• ^ha' »oi«e have in- 
 
 «ver a passiv™ enfef m7„ ^^T ° f^"" f"™ ' Have they 
 .itive, cSn thl^ C^J, inXa^rvScM"*" "" """" ''-• 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 of in this sentenflfi i a «„ _t° iZ «i.' r."^^ '.^ t**e person spoken 
 
 He studies. Does th#»' 'wnr.,1 "ir^"* " ^^'^ '^ ^'*'*^ ***' ^o^° » Ans.— 
 
 *oted upon ? ins -Aral'^^'f 'Tf '*"? "^^^^^ ^ *<'ting, or as 
 
 F" -ans.-A8 acting. In wW 7oice then is "studies r 
 
 "# 
 
 i 
 
HOOBB. 
 
 tf 
 
 ot a passive 
 )rm, but not 
 <?, means the 
 
 transitive, is 
 bs. 3,] it h 
 >; as, "My 
 
 passiro voice ex- 
 rent way. With 
 p thing spoken of, 
 26, the subject is 
 sme then strictlj 
 distinguish those 
 subject acts or is 
 epresents its sub- 
 which represents 
 
 t-mi 
 
 A„o Active vo'ce Change the sentence so as to make ''gram- 
 ^ 'Tluf thfnrsDoken of aod express the same meaning. Ans— 
 TralartftXd'b/john » Laly^e this s^itence in the same 
 
 ""^'hrstildies grammar. Cain slew Abel. Noah built 
 the ark. The temple was built by Solomon. Columbus 
 discovered America. Pride ruins thousands Most men 
 are governed by custom. I have written a letter. 
 
 Lesson 19.— Moods. 
 [Review the preceding Lesson, and answer the questions.] 
 
 Mood is the mode or maimer of expressing 
 the signification of a verb. 
 
 Verbs have^i?^ moods ; namely, the la^di- 
 cative, Potential, Subjunctive, Imperative, 
 and Infinitive, 
 
 1. The Indicative mood declares the fact 
 expressed by the verb simply, and without 
 limitation ; as. He loves ; He is loved. 
 
 2. The Potential mood declares, not the 
 fact expressed by the verb, but only its possi- 
 bility ; or the liberty, power, will, or obliga- 
 tion, of the subject with respect to it ; as, 
 
 The wind may blow; We way walk or ride; I can swim; He 
 iimild not stay ; You shmdd obey your parents. 
 
 3. The Subjunctive mood represents the 
 fact expressed by the verb, not as actual, but 
 as coi\ditional, desirable, or contingent ; as, 
 
 « If thy presence go not with us, carry us not up hence."—" 
 
 that he were wise!" ,^ , •, j ^ •«. 
 
 This mood is subjoined to another verb, and dependent on it. 
 
 4i. The Imperativjs muod couiiii.an-KAS, 
 horts, entreats, or permits ; as, 
 
 rv^^^ 
 

 ■\\iv 
 
 
 -*4 lNTBO.ncX,ON TO ...„„„,, ,,,^^^^_ 
 
 without^ disVn^tiVpfCor r^^^^' 
 and comn^only has io befofeTat'^otS 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 1. The subjunctive mood differs fm™ .1, • j. 
 ~»«.d .pd the third pereon ZlC^o'll"^'"' ""'' '" "■» 
 v«b «,„ J... differs .1.0 i„ the XZl "■" """"' "»»»• ^h. 
 
 ^ the J«»guag.«f ad'dressisX, u " -T'^'r- '^'"'"-«' 
 
 » equivalent to, -Ut then him tote "w.; ^^^^ '"" '''^<' 
 
 Pfflative, and /«„the infinitivl^„t! ' ^T " ■^'" " ""^ P^P*' im- 
 
 The infinitive mood mafb/fn ™ > tSeeLEsso»66, l.a] 
 
 the nominative and the Zel? k"" "" " ^*''»' »<«»■. "-"^nr 
 
 l-e-ce it is used eithetll? r^^a"' 1"' "■' '^''•- ' »^ 
 
 J-" «^'er it. fSee W» es! trruTerran" r/"' " " ""* •"- 
 
 QITESTIONS. 
 
 ""deWSThe" pi';5 h°al t'L^'^"""'"? J^««««> will be better 
 therefore omitted here. ^""^ "'"•'Sl' I-eseon 23. The/arl 
 
 '■''"rRef^f"^^^"''^''-'-^^ 
 f««"«''"'e two preceding tes«,ns.] 
 
TENSES, OR DISTINCTIONS OF TIMB. 
 
 45 
 
 my people; ffothy 
 
 Ttme is naturally divided into Present, Past and FtUure : and 
 an acTon m^be fepreaented, either as incomplete and coDtmuing, 
 5? Ts comXted at tfe time spoken of. This gives rise to six tenses 
 onlv rrS whic^^ are expressed in English by a distinct form «f 
 ?heVerb TLotbers are^formed by the aid of auxiliary verbs ; 
 
 **""'' ( Action continuing ; as, I love, I do love, I am loving. 
 
 Peksent. ^ j^ction completed; as, I have loved. . 
 
 I l/lon continuing; as, I loved. I did love. I was loving. 
 *^^^^* 1 Action completed; as, I had loved. 
 _ Action continuing ; as, I shall or will love. 
 
 ^^"*'- ( Action completed ; I shall have loved. 
 
 The tenses in English are six ; namely, the 
 Present, the Present-perfect, the Past, the 
 Past-perfect, the Future, and the Future- 
 perfect. 
 
 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 The Indicative mood has all the six tenses ; 
 they are used as follows : ^ 
 
 1. The Present tense expresses what is 
 going on at the present time ; as, I love you. 
 
 I am loved, 
 
 2. The Present-perfect tense represents 
 an action or event as completed at the pre- 
 sent time ; or in a period of which the pre- 
 sent forms a part ; as, " John has cut his 
 finger." " I have sold my horse." " I have 
 done nothing this week." 
 
 3. The Past tense expresses what took 
 place in past time; as, "God said, let there 
 be light;" « The ship sai^^c^ when the mail 
 arrived.^^ 
 
 4. The Past-pereect tense represents an 
 action or event as completed at or before a 
 certain past time; as, "I had walked six miles 
 
*6 I^TB0B,70TI„N TO ANAlmOAL OEAMMAE. 
 
 tie p'lSs^rLT^r^f it -J.^" 
 
 you ag^in and your hearts i ^-oT^.?^'' 
 b. ^^e FuTUBE-PEKFECT intimates that «« 
 
 action or event will be compIeteTat or Ke 
 a certain time, yet future • a« « 70*77/ 
 
 gotmyWnbLretSVoJkto'^^^^^^^^ 
 
 TENSES OP THE OTHER MOODS. 
 
 andr£Ti!^:,^:r^-^-/-^. the P«.,. 
 
 by the aaaliary, or «J!^V^J7' ""'L "' '''''Slion, expressed 
 not expreg, the act of ^rW„l J'""' ' *"! ' " ^ "V ^rite." doe. 
 
 . Jhieh it etaode connecter tZ^.k "''''''' ^ °*" "»<!' ^Uh 
 Past tense. {See ZTi,. Gr. 428-/32T *''""''"' "'"' *« 
 
 8. The Subjunctive mood, in its nron^^ 
 M preset, tliou^h the «■,. ^^S^^*"- 
 
GEAMMAE. 
 
 ad taken their 
 
 Jses what will 
 > "I will see 
 dl rejoice." 
 mates that an 
 'd at or before 
 " I shall have 
 to-morrow.** 
 
 oxy, are called Sm- 
 ?OMpouNo tenses. 
 
 ODS. 
 
 four tenses; 
 i, the Fasty 
 
 r the act expressed 
 igation^ expressed 
 t raaj write," does 
 )nlj the liberty to 
 
 mood is less defi- 
 other words with 
 pecially with the 
 
 its proper 
 
 The verb 
 
 t. The in. 
 
 5 Subjunc- 
 
 always be 
 ^and, &e., 
 
 TENSES, OE DISTINCTIONS OP TIME, 
 
 47 
 
 10. The Infinitive mood has two tenses ; 
 the P^^esent and the Perfect. 
 
 11 Participles have three tenses ; the Pre- 
 sent, the Past, and the Perfect; as, Lomng, 
 loved, having loved, 
 
 [See Analytical and Practical Grammar, 455]. 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE TENSES. 
 1 The Present tense is used to express, Ist-the simple exist- 
 ence of the fact; as. - He speaker 2d-wh:it is habitual or always 
 true ; as, « He takiB snuff." 3d-ln historical narration, it is used 
 for the past ; as, Cffisar leaves Gaul," for " CfBsar lejt Gaul." 
 
 2. The Present-perfect is used, l«t— To express what has taken 
 place at the present time, or in a period of ti.ne of which the pre- 
 sent forms a part; as. « My father has arrived:* 2d-To express 
 an act op state continued through a period of time reaclung to, and 
 including the present; as, "He has [now] studied six months. 
 3d— To express an act long since completed, when the reference is 
 not to the act of finishing, but to the thing finished as still existing; 
 -as, " Cicero has written orations." 
 
 3. The time indicated by the Past tense is regarded as entirely 
 past, however near; as, **I saw him a moment ago." It ia also 
 used to express what was customary in past time ; as, " She attended 
 church regularly." 
 
 4. The Past tenses of the Potential, and the Subjunctive mood, 
 are less definite in regard to time, than the same tenses in the 
 Indicative. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What are tenses ? How is time naturally divided ? In each of 
 these, how may an action or state be represented? How many 
 tenses are there in the English verb ? How many has the Indica- 
 tive mood? What are they? What does the present tense ex- 
 press?— the Present-perfect ?— the Past ?—Pa8t.perfect ?— the Fu- 
 ture ?— the Future-perfect ? 
 
 Hnw manv tenaea has the Potential mood?— the Subjunctive ?— 
 the Imperative ?-the Infinitive ?-the Participles? In what different 
 ways ia the Present tense used?— the Present-perfect?— the Past! 
 
 ^^-^.r 
 
^ INTBODUOTION 
 
 TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAE. 
 
 Lesson 2l.-~Participlea. 
 
 [Revie,^ four preceding Lessons., and answer Bromrfl, a 
 
 A Participie is a word which as a vp^j, 
 jective, quahfies a noun or substantive; as. 
 
 -reird^ffi-'Xt'-j;; ^^ci t:^^^^ - ^«- 
 
 fl,. P 'J'^''^ *^-«e participles ; the Present 
 the Past, and the Perfr^t • «= t ■ ■^'^V ^^"^^ 
 
 been UTd ' ''""^ ^"^'^^ ^<^ed, having 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 dagger under hig cloak —In the nn,*; * • ' . ^^ <^onceaUd a 
 P-;. .. He .aa . dlggt IS^ ^'1^-™ '' 
 
 passive Toice. ' "^ * P**'™ ««»ifioation in the 
 
 possessive. In this charae Ir ^^» ""^f^J**™ «««. but not the 
 "ay .till retain the goZtent of r 7'' "' ' ''""»"''« ^"b 
 .fit by inserting aort^lTe l:'^!:! " " ""^ *" ■^'''='«» 
 it fSee e^.„p,es, An. & PrGr 4627 '"'°'' ""^ *"" 
 
 of comparison: as. A„ „«....".''" "diectivee, and as euoh admit 
 •torr. ■ A mo,« dW;/ wradr" ""^' '"""'"9-^ '-o,t amuHng. 
 
 '.4 
 
 
 
KUMBBB AND RBB80N. 
 
 4» 
 
 Jromptly sDd oor. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 Whati.ap«tWpl.l How "^J. P-jSP^r.^Oivran ex^m- 
 
 "TBlfo«7rS to the n„t Le„oye,iew t..,ou«b.y ..» 
 the beginning in two or three recitations.] 
 
 Lesson ^%— Number and Person. 
 peview the three preeeding Lessons, and answer the questions.] 
 
 1 Every tense of the verb, except in the 
 Infinitive mood, has two Numbers, the Sing- 
 ular and the Plural; and each of these has 
 three Persons, except in the Imperative, 
 which has only the Second. 
 
 2 The PiRST person asserts of the person 
 speaking; its subject is always I in the Sin- 
 gular, and we in the plural; as, I write ; we 
 write. 
 
 3 The Second person asserts of the per- 
 son'spoken to ; its subje6t is always thou m 
 the singular, and ye or you in the plural ; as, 
 Thou writest ; ye or you write. 
 
 4 The Third person asserts of the person 
 or thing spoken of; its subject is any noun, 
 or the pronoun he, she, it, or they, used in- 
 stead of it; as, Jb^ii reads; ^^ walks; theyxun. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 1. The first, second, and third persons plural, are always like 
 the first person singular. 
 
ii i 
 
 50 
 
 I si's fl 
 
 ■ ill 
 
 INTBODUOTION TO ANALYTICAL OBAHWAB. 
 
 2. The second person eingnlor of the nresent !nrf;...- 
 .nd, ,„ ., 0, „, . ,,_ ,^„„ il • P^ «•" '"<^««t.re active^ 
 
 ».4:tr;re:,:;;t.f;/;-:\^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 gra-ro style, M; »s. He ,«M«, or Zla AH T' °\'; "■" 
 
 *■ Verbs in y with a oonsr.niuit beforn » „!.» 
 the terminations «,, „, .„, ,,,. Lt n„U V ^'^ " '"^ ' ^''"'^ 
 lri». truth, tried, trginff. ' ''"^°''* "^' "• "if. M'K 
 
 prel?t;i"!;'"hrrp;r::: :'""r "'!,""'•"«'• •°-'»- »■ 
 
 of the verb. When t CT "riaV"' '" """"'" «" '"''J"'' 
 
 person, and a pronoun st „di " „s,ea toTV' "":' " "" ""■'•" 
 der; a. ro ,,., i, p,_, ^^.; -^^J - '^ene.er ^„. 
 
 869. Alao, Lesson 66, Sub-rule IJ. L^n. 4 P. Qr, 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 tin^io" oTi^?XtonT HoT ' ^^'^^ ^^^ ^^ "o dis, 
 number ? What moo5 fas only th^selT/ P'T°^ ^'^ ^^ ^^^h. 
 the first person assert f WW , f h! k- P!"°" ' ^^ ^hom do«s 
 the plural ? Of whom do^ the Innr^J''* ^" ^^« ^•"g"!*^'' »-3a 
 subject in the singular ?!!„ the oluraFr'nr'f'^' * What is its 
 the third person Issert; What ilu![ k^^ ^^^^ ««• what does 
 
 t:^i^!!-f^^^i HuTs^t^\^o1.d"tl^..!*:'!^^p-'-i- 
 
 each tense are alike ? How is 7he 'se^rud "nT"' ' .^^"^ P'^'*'* ^^ 
 
 indicative f-in the p'sT^e^S^'wl'^ ^^^'"^d 
 
 T of the present in J^L':!r.lLT,h«" ^the third 
 
 m the present 
 
 person 8ingula;7f 'irrpr'^ent'inrnJ-'''^ ^ When IsThrthird 
 J/A^~Whfn by addingTor"! or S'rH:"'^ f*^."^*^*"^ « o? 
 the verb ends ,n y aftel- a consonant ^^"^ " '* ^^^«»«5 ^hen 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 hol-iris"fit:r' ^"^°" singular of the follow'ng' '^erbe, and 
 2. Tell the third person, and how it is formed 
 
 gular; ar-to^u^dl't-'^lt r^te^l," ^ ^^^^ P-- Bi- 
 as, J' he tells." ' ""'' ^'' ^^ «^^h» ^vhen put in the third i 
 
 Teii. 
 
 «peak, «leep. walk, read, learn. «mell, «ee. he« 
 
CONJUGATION OF TERB8. 
 
 51 
 
 I taste, touch, handle, write, pay, eat, drink, warm, teach, 
 i CO, do, fill, play, stand, sell, buy, study, copy, 
 i 4. In the follov;ing words, tell Tvhich nre in the first person, and 
 I vby —in the second, and why ;-ia the third, and why. 
 
 5 Prefix to each verb, in the following list, the pronoun of th^ 
 same person and number as the verb: as. 1 love, thou lovest, Ac. 
 
 Love, lovest, loves, runs, runnest, sleep, teach, preach- 
 es, teachest, writes, write, eats, goes, goest, go, tell, 
 teaches, speaks, read, readest, sews, pay, look, walks, 
 jump, hop; skip, laughs, sing, cry, criest, study, studies. 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 Lesson ^Z.— Conjugation of Verba. 
 
 FThe pupil should be thoroughly drilled in this Lesson, till he i» 
 able to tell every part at once and correctly— and to give prompt- 
 ly any part of the verb that may be required.] 
 
 1. The Conjugation of a verb is the regu- 
 lar combination and arrangement of its sev- 
 eral moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. 
 
 2. In the active voice, most verbs have 
 two forms; the Common; as, I read; and 
 the Progressive; as, I am reading. See. 
 Lesson 27, note. 
 
 Besides these, in the present and the past indicative active, there 
 is a third form called the Emphatic ; as, I do read, I did read. The 
 other tenses, and also the progressive and the passive form, are 
 rendered en^phatic by placing a greater stress of voice on the first 
 auxiliary ; as, I have read— I am reading— it is read. 
 
 3. In parsing, a verb is conjugated by 
 giving its principal parts, as follows : 
 
 A^onvB. 
 Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 Love, 
 Am loved. 
 
 Past. 
 Loved, 
 Was loved, 
 
 Past Part, 
 
 Loveu. 
 
 Been loved. 
 
 
52 iNTBODuonojsr to analytical geammab. 
 
 The Verb TO BE. 
 
 The intransitive irregular verb To be, is 
 inflected through all its moods and tenses, 
 as lollows ; 
 
 PRINCIPAL PABTS. 
 
 Past, was. Past Participate been. 
 
 Present, am. 
 
 Singular, 
 
 1. I am. 
 
 2. Thou art. 
 8. He is. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Plural 
 
 1. We are. 
 
 2. You are* 
 8. Thejare. 
 
 PRESENT-PfiEFEOT TENSE. 
 
 Sign, have. 
 1. I have been i, ^^ ,, ^^ 
 
 I' ^Z^t ^''"- 2. You have been. 
 
 3. He has been. g. They have been. 
 
 !• I was. 
 2. Thou wast. 
 8. He was. 
 
 1. I had been. 
 
 2. Thou hadet been. 
 
 3. He had been. 
 
 1. I shall be. 
 
 2. Thou Shalt be. 
 8. He shall be. 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 1. We were. 
 
 2. You were. 
 
 3. They were. 
 
 PAST-PERFEOT TENSE. 
 
 Sign, had^ 
 
 1. We had been. 
 
 2. You had been. 
 
 3. They had been. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Signs, shall, mW.— Inflect with each. 
 
 1. We shall be. 
 
 2. You shall be. 
 8. They shall be. 
 
 PUTURE-PERFEOT TENSE, 
 
 Signs, shall have, will Aawe.— Inflect with each. 
 1. I shall have been. i. We shall have been, 
 
 iuou snaic iiave faeea 
 
 a mi- 
 
 8. He shall have been. 
 
 2. You shall have been. 
 8. They shall have been. 
 
THE VBBB TO BE. 
 
 68 
 
 ■5*,' 
 
 4* 
 
 POTBKTIAL MOOD, 
 
 FSB3ENT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, may, «a«, mM««.— Inflect with each. 
 
 8if,gular. -Pf«'«'- ^ 
 
 ■r u 1 We may be. 
 
 PBKSENT-PBEFEOT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, may have, can have, or must have. --InM with each. 
 1. I Say have have'been. 1. We may have b«e° 
 
 2 Thou mayst have been. 2 You may have been. 
 
 I He may Lve been. 3. They may have been. 
 
 FAST TENSE. 
 
 Signs, might, could, vxmld, «Ao«W.--Inflect with each. 
 
 1. I might be. 1. ye might be. 
 
 2. Thou mightst be. 2. You mi^^t be. 
 8. He might be. 3. They might be. 
 
 PAST-PE&FSOT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, migU have, could have, would have, should Aav*,— Inflect 
 
 with each. 
 
 1. I might have been. 1. 5^ might have been. 
 
 2. Thou mightst have been. 2. You mi^ht have been. 
 
 3. He might have been. , 8. They might have been. 
 
 Singular, 
 
 1. // 1 be. 
 
 2. If thou be. 
 8. Jf he be. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 PEESBNT TENSE {SuhjUUCtive fotm). 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. //we be. 
 
 2. ^ you be. 
 8. If they be. 
 
 PAST TENSE {Subjutictive form).* 
 1.^ I were. 1. ijrwewere. 
 
 2. Jf thou were or wert. 2. If you were. 
 
 8. If he were. 8. If they were. 
 
 * The indicative form in all the tenses is the same as the indica- 
 tive witii a conjunction prefixed; thus, If I am, If I have been. If 
 I wat. If I had been. If I ehall or will be, If I shall have been. 
 
 B 
 
 I 
 
61 INTBODUCTION TO AJTALTTICAL OBIMMAE. 
 
 Singular, 
 2. Be, or be thou. 
 
 P&K3BNT TBN8E. 
 
 To be. 
 
 Pbesbnt, Being. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Plural. 
 2. Be, or be ye or you. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PERFECT TENSK. 
 
 To have been. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Past, Been. Perfect, Having been. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Let the pupil tell the tense, mood, person, and number of the 
 folloMTing words— parts of the verb to be; thus, "Am," present, 
 indicative, first person, singular. 
 
 2. Lot him parse the same words ; thus, « Am" is a verb, intran- 
 sitive, irregular; am, was, been; in the present, indicative, first 
 person, singular. ' 
 
 Am, is, art, wast, I was, they were, we are, hast been, 
 has been, we have been, hadst been, we had been, you 
 have been, she has been, we were, they had been. 
 
 I shall be, shalt be, we will be, thou wilt be, they shall 
 be, it will be, thou wilt have been, we have been they 
 will have been, we shall have been, am, it is. ' 
 
 I can be, mayst be, canst be, she may be, you may be, 
 he must be, they should be, mightst be, he would be, it 
 could be, wouldst be, you could be, he may have been 
 wast. ' 
 
 We may have been, mayst have been, they may have 
 been, I might have been, you should have been, wouldst 
 have been ; (if) thou be, we be, he be, thou wert, we 
 were. 
 
 Be thou, be, to be, being, to have been, if I be, be ye, 
 been, having been, if we be, if they be, to be. 
 
 uJ' -^S.*^® following sentences, parse the words in order ; thus. 
 Snow IS a noun, neuter, the nominative singular, because the sub- 
 leotoi "i«." *'/«" is a verb infi«ans.;tii»/» .'^^^ — 1«-. ..^ 
 
 m the present indicative, third person, lingular. "TFAtV is an 
 adjective, qualifies mow; compared, white, whiter, whitest. 
 
 Vtl-ltiil^si^-^l^i 
 
}BA.HMAB. 
 
 
 THE VEBB TO LOTB. 
 
 55 
 
 ye or you. 
 
 been. 
 
 iFEOT, Having been. 
 
 , and number of the 
 IS, "Am," present, 
 
 tt" is a verb, intran- 
 nt, indicative, first 
 
 e are, hast been, 
 3 had been, you 
 had been. 
 
 ilt be, they shall 
 have been, thej 
 it is. 
 
 be, you may be, 
 he would be, it 
 may have been, 
 
 they may have 
 e been, wouldst 
 thou wert, we 
 
 I, if I be, be ye, 
 5 be. 
 
 ds in order; thua, 
 , because the sub> 
 
 S.I j U7/'£f XCTCC?! uCCTi / 
 
 . "TTAtVisan 
 r, whitest. 
 
 Snow is white ; he was a good man ; we have been 
 younger ; she has been happy ; it had been late ; we are 
 lold ; vou will be wise ; it will be time ; if they be thme ; 
 be cautious ; be heedful youth ; we may be rich. 
 
 Lesson 24^— The Verb to love. 
 The regular verb to love, in the common 
 form, is inflected through all its moods and 
 tenses, as follows : 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 iFreaent, love. Past, loved. PoBt participle, loved 
 
 UfDIOATIVB MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TBNSE.* 
 
 Singular. 
 L Hove. 
 I. Thoulovest. 
 \. He loves (^or lovetb). 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We love. 
 
 2. You love; 
 
 3. They love. 
 
 PRB8ENT-PEEFE0T TENSB. 
 
 1. I have loved. 
 '2. Thou hast loved. 
 8. He has or hath loved. 
 
 ll. I loved. 
 P2. Thoulovedst. 
 3. He loved. 
 
 Sign, have. 
 
 1. We have loved. 
 
 2. You have loved. 
 
 3. They have loved. 
 
 PAST TENSE -f 
 
 1. We loved. 
 
 2. You loved. 
 8. They loved. 
 
 •present TENSE. {Emphatic form). 
 
 1. I do love. 1. We do love. 
 
 2. Thou dost love. 2. You do love. 
 8. He does or doth love. 3. They do love. 
 
 fpAST TENSE. {Emphatic form.) 
 
 1. 1 aia i0V6. i« VTCUiUiuvc. 
 
 2. Thou didst love. 
 8. He did love. 
 
 2. You did Idve. 
 8. They did lave. 
 
56 
 
 IKTBOB¥CTIOir TO AlfALTTlOl-L OBAMMAB. 
 
 'm 
 
 I . \ 
 
 f s 
 
 1. I had loved. 
 
 2. Thou hadst loved. 
 8. He had loved. 
 
 PAST'PERFEOT TENSE. 
 
 Sign, Jiad. 
 
 1. We had loved. 
 
 2. You had loved. 
 
 3. Ihey had loved. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Signs, ahallf will. — Inflect with each. 
 
 1. I shall love. 1. We shall love. 
 
 2. Thou shalt love. 2. You shall love. 
 8. He shall love. 8. They shall love. 
 
 FUTUaE-PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, hhcdl have^ mil ^av0.— Inflect with each. 
 
 1. 1 shall have loved. 1. We shall have loved. 
 
 2. Thou shalt have loved. 2. You shall have loved. 
 8. He shall have loved. 8. They shall have loved. 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, may^ can, mwafc—Infleot with each. 
 
 1. I may love. i. We may love. 
 
 2. Thou mavst love. 2. You may love. 
 8. Ho may love. 8. They may love. 
 
 PRESENT-PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, may have, can have* mutt *avtf.— Inflect with each. 
 1. 1 may have loved. l. We may have loved. 
 
 2. Thou mavst have lovod. 2. You may have loved. 
 
 3* He may have loved. 8. They may have loved. 
 
 PiST TENSE. 
 
 Signs, miffhtf eouldf would, should. — Inflect with each. 
 
 1. I might love. l. We might love. 
 
 2. Thou mightst love. 2. You might love. 
 
 8. He might love. 8. They might love. 
 
 PABT-PERFEOT TENSE. 
 
 SigDBi might have^ could have, wotdd have, should Aavtf,— lofleot 
 
 with each. 
 
 1. I might have loved. l. We might have loved. 
 
 2. Thou mightst have loved. 2. You might have loved. 
 
 9. Axc might havo loyed. S. They might have loved. 
 
 * Can have is not used in affirmative sentences. 
 
IBAMMAB. 
 
 THE VBEB TO LOYB. 
 
 sr 
 
 nid Aaw*— loflecfe 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 PBBSBNT TBN3E {SubjUncHve fomy 
 
 1. //Hove. 
 
 2. J7 thou love. 
 S. J/ he love. 
 
 1. // we love. 
 
 2. j^'' you love. 
 8. j^ they love. 
 
 \. Jfl love. 
 
 2. ^ thou lovest. 
 
 8. j^ he loves (or loveth.) 
 
 PEESENT TENSE {Indicative fo*m.) 
 
 1. i/ we love. 
 
 2. // you love. 
 8. ijr they love. 
 
 I. I/I have loved, 
 
 2. //tLou hast loved. 
 
 3. if he has or hath loved. 
 
 1. If Iloved. 
 
 2. Irthoulovedst. 
 i8. ^ he loved. 
 
 PRE3EMT-PEEFECT TENSE. 
 
 1. If we have loved. 
 
 2. If yovi have loved. 
 8. 7/ they have loved. 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 1. // we loved. 
 
 2. If you loved. 
 8. If they loved. 
 
 PAST-PEBFEOT TENSE. 
 FUTUEE TENSE. 
 
 1 // 1 Shall or will love. 1. If we shall or will love 
 
 // thou Shalt or wilt love. 2. 7/ you shal or will love. 
 Z\ i/he shall or will love. 2. // they shall or wiU love. 
 
 FUTURE-PEEFECT TENSE. 
 
 1 in shall or will have loved. 1. // we shall or will have loved. 
 
 2 #tioushaltorwilthaveloved.2. 7/ you shall or wi have loved. 
 t |he Tall or will have loved. 8. //they shall or will have loved.. 
 
 •The Present suhjunctive is here given in two forms : Ist. in the 
 wbjunctive or elliptical form, used when both contingency and 
 ffity are implieS ; and 2d. the indicative form, used when tontm- 
 gency only, and not fiturity is implied. In narsmg. the later should 
 le called the " indicative used subjunctively, ' being the indicative 
 mood in form, and rendered subjunctive only by the conjunction 
 prefixed. This is true also of the other teases m this mood. 
 
 fn.^ *m«i,of?n fnrms of the Dresent are. If I do love, if thou do 
 lo^,ifhe7olove,eiQ. ; of the past, If I did love, if «Aott a%m tove, 
 etc., as in the indicativei 
 
56 
 
 IKTBODTTOTIOir TO ANALYTICAL OBAMMAB. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Common form. 2. Love, or love thou. 2. Love, or love ye or yon. 
 Emphatic form. 2. Do thou love. 2. Do ye or you love. 
 
 Paesknt, To love. 
 
 IinPINITIVB MOOD. 
 
 Febfeot, To have loved. 
 
 PAEXrOIPLES. 
 
 P&ESKNT, Loviug. Past, Loved. Peefkct, Having loved. 
 
 Parsing. — ^A verb is parsed by stating its 
 kind (i.e., whether transitive or intransitive) ; 
 its form, (whether regular or irregular) ; con- 
 jugating if, and telling in what tense, mood, 
 voice, number and person, it is found ; also 
 its subject : thus, 
 
 "Heloyes." Loves is a verb, transitive, regular; love^ lovedt 
 loved; found in the present, indicative, active ; third person singu- 
 lar ; and affirms of its subject, he. 
 
 N.B. ^ It is important in parsing to state •verything belonging to 
 a word in as few words as possible, and always in the same order. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is the conjugation of a verb ? How is a verb conjugated I 
 Conjugate the verb love in the active voice. Say the indicative 
 present — past — future — the present-perfect — the past-perfect — fu- 
 ture-perfect. Say the first person singular, in each tense — the 
 second—the third — the first person plural — the second — the third. 
 Say the emphatic form, in the present — in the past. What are the 
 signs (or auxiliaries) of the present-perfect ? — the past-perfect ? — the 
 future ?-the future-perfect I —the subjunctive present ?— present-per- 
 fect f — past I— past perfect ? &,o. What is the sign of the iofiaiti ve f 
 
 EXERCISE L 
 
 1. Oo over the following Exercise, and tell the tense, mood, and 
 Toice of each verb : thus. " He loves.'* present indicative^ active- 
 
 2. Go over it again, and tell the person and number ; thus, loves, 
 third person, singular. 
 
mAMMAB. 
 
 THE TEEB TO LOVE. 
 
 59 
 
 Hural. 
 
 2, or love ye or yon. 
 re or you love. 
 
 ave loved. 
 
 r, Having loved. 
 
 3jr stating its 
 atransitive) ; 
 Bgular) ; con- 
 tensey mood, 
 found ; also 
 
 Bgular; love^ loved, 
 third perBOQ siugu- 
 
 ^thing belonging to 
 in the same order. 
 
 \ verb conjugated I 
 Say the indicative 
 e past-perfect — fu- 
 i each tense — the 
 second — the third. 
 ist. What are the 
 past-perfect ? — the 
 »ent ?— present-per- 
 n of the iofiaitifref 
 
 ) tense, mood, and 
 : indicative, actives 
 
 imber ; thus, love$, 
 
 1, Go over it again, and oin these together; and so tell tbe tense, 
 mood, void, number, and person; and always m this order, 
 as, loie8, present, indicative, active, third person, singular, 
 the imperative, omit the tense, and say thus, love thmt, impera- 
 tive, active, second person, singular, 
 the infinitive, omit the person and number, and say thus, To love; 
 
 present, infinitive, active, 
 the participle, name only the tense and voice; thus, loving; 
 
 present participle, active. 
 N. B —The pronoun is no part of the verb, but helps to show its 
 jrson and number ; and the auxiliaries (or signs) are not taken 
 ,para*^^ely, but always with the verb; so that the two words, and 
 metimes three, as in the past-perfect potential, are parsed to- 
 ither as one word ; thus, have loved, the present-perfect, indicative, 
 itive, Ac. . 
 
 N B —This Exercise should be repeated till the pupil can do it 
 eorrectiy, rapidly, and easily, and without missing, either in the 
 number or order of the things to be stated. 
 
 He loves, they love, I have loved, you will love, thou 
 -jachest, they will learn, he has written, I had given, 
 lames will go, John may come, he might read, they 
 ' ould have studied, children play, boys studied, they 
 d study. Write thou, come ye. To love, to smg, to 
 ve played, reading, sleeping, running, loved, learned, 
 »4ving loved, having gone, birds fly, horses galloped, the 
 re burns, the sun did shine, the moon has changed. 
 N. B.— Pupils may be required to make exercises of this kind 
 ir themselves. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 I Before beginning this Exercise, let the pupil go back and review 
 ,§ioroughly Lesson 16, and the exercises on it; then 
 
 Tell which words are verbs, and why ; and whether transitive or 
 
 intransitive, and why. 
 Tell their tense, mood, voice, person, and number, as in the pre- 
 ceding Exercise. 
 Go over it again, and parse each verb by putting all these to- 
 gether ; thus, loves, is a verb, transitive, in the present, indica- 
 tive, active, third person, singular. 
 
 He loves us, I will love him. Q-ood boys will study 
 fheir lessons. Children love play. The dog killed my 
 abbit. James has written a letter. Cows eat bay. ^ A 
 
 :e warms the room. Bring some wood. I have studied 
 
60 
 
 INTBODTJOTION TO ANALYTICAL GRAMMAR. 
 
 *ilj! 
 
 m 
 
 I'i'ji. 
 
 ,i,;i!ii 
 
 '■^ii 
 
 grammar. Q-irls may write letters. Tour sister can 
 sing. He would like to bear a song. Give that book 
 to me. I will give this book to you. Lend me youp 
 pen. Children should obey their parents ; they should 
 love God. Eemember the Sabbath day, to keep it. AU 
 men must die. Time waits for no man. Do good to all 
 men, John will mend my pen ; I will thank him. You 
 would oblige me by assisting me to learn this lesson. 
 Tell Henry to shut the door. 
 
 "And he opened his mouth, and taught them, saying, 
 Blessed are the poor in spirit : for theirs is the kingdom 
 of heaven. Blessed are they that mourn : for they shall 
 be comforted. Blessed are the meek: for they shall 
 inherit the earth. Blessed are they which do hunger 
 and thirst after righteousness : for they shall be filled.**^ 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. STie Nominative Case. ' 
 
 N. B. A verb in the active voice tells what some person or thing 
 does. That person or thing then is its sutgect, and is in the nomi- 
 native case; thus, in the first sentence of the preceding Exercise, 
 the word "loves" tells what "he" does; Ae, therefore, i» its subject, 
 and is in the nominative case. 
 
 Point out the verb in each sentence of the pr-^eeding Exercise ; 
 tell what word is its subject, and why ? What case is the subject in ? 
 
 2. The Objective Caae. 
 
 A transitive verb in the active voice tells what its subject does 
 to some person or thing. That person or thing is the object of the 
 verb, and is in the objective case. Thus, in the above sentence, 
 '* He loves us," loves is a transitive verb, and tells what its subject, 
 he, does to iis. Us, then, is its object, and is in the objective case. 
 
 The nominative, or subjeot. Is usually before the verb ; the ob- 
 jective is usually after it. 
 
 Point out the transitive verbs in the preceding Exercise. Tell 
 what word is the object in each sentence, and what case it is in. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 Go over the preceding Exercise, and parse each word in orde**; 
 tJie nouns as directed. Lesson 8, p. 18; — the ar/tV/«« as directed,. 
 Lesson 9, p. 21 ; — the adjectives as directed, Lesson 11, p. 25 ; — the 
 pronouns as directed, Lesson 12, p. 28 ; and the verbs as directed 
 in this Lesson, p. 68. 
 
AMUAR. 
 
 BEOmVB JOBM OP THE YEEB. 
 
 61 
 
 Lesson <ib.-Negative Form of the Verb 
 
 The verb is .ade to <J™, by e«;»| tU:n\h:':* ^ 
 pie form ; as, " Thou love.t «o< , and bet ^^^^ „ jn.en two 
 
 LrS;^treT:o?"";aoAtwee„ the.-, a. I»o.i.not 
 'Tlretfinitive and participles, the negative is put first. a..Kot 
 *"r:iitrisse,do™»ed^^*^^^^^^ 
 
 ^::^%CLS'^%-:^^^^^ show L n-aooer of u..og 
 
 the negative. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Pass. Phep. 
 Past. 
 
 Past Perf. 
 Future. 
 FuT. Perf. 
 
 n T Ar. nnt love 2. Thou dost not ove, &o. 
 
 1. I do not iove. . ^^^ j^^^j^ ^q. 
 
 1. I have not loved. 2. inou ^^^ 
 
 1. I did not ove. 2. Thou didBt ^^^^. ^^^ 
 
 1. I had not loved. 2. 1 hou naa ^^ 
 
 I: 'illilJntoJrve 2. ?h:urha{tnothaveloved,&c. 
 loved. 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 i 1 o Thon canst not love, Ac. 
 
 Peksknt. 1 . I can not love 2. ^ou c^nst ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 Pebb. Perf. 1. I may not have 2. inou m y 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 . 1 7/ I do not love. 2. // thou do not love. Ac. 
 We other tenses are the same as in the indicative. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SU.,. 2. Love not, or do not thou J>lur. 2. I^v^e^not, or do not ,e 
 luve. 
 
 Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Not to love. Perf. Not to have loved. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present, isot loving. 
 
 
 Pbrf. Not having loved. 
 
^!;! 
 
 11 
 
 
 Wesson 2e.~I„terroffative Form of n \r r 
 The verb i. mado .„ . t -^ ''^ ^"•*- 
 
 I3fDlOATIVB MOOD. 
 
 I*11K8BNT. 1 J)q 2 1 . 
 
 jBEs. Pbb,. i! Have I loved ? o' 2"'* ^^«" ^^^e ? &c 
 
 ^^. PiCBK. J. Shall I have loved f 2 wl ^" 1^^^ ^ ^^ 
 
 ^' ^'^^ ^«" have lov^d^ ,fec. 
 
 POTENXIAI MOOD. 
 Pbksent. 1. Mav I love ? o n 
 
 Jem. Picbf. 1. Maj i have loved ? o P*"'f ![^°" ^«^«? <fec. 
 
 Past Pebf. l. Might I have g' S? **^" ^^« ? ^^c- 
 
 loved ? ^' ^"^^^^ thou have loved ? Ac 
 
 . QUESTIONS. 
 
 the ZXZ^r^lZitlL ^''•' » «"> -«g««™ placed in 
 there are two anxiliTrip/f' wv* "ompound form ! mlrTll 
 pies I SaytheiSZ'' ^J"«. i" the mnm.ZiXti^ 
 -the other tenses. '^"'°"" '° «■« "egi'ive form throu^houn 
 
 ■f 
 
 fw. 
 
PB08M881T111 POBK OF THB AOTITB TOIOE. 68 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1. Pot lb. «rb. m the following seatences, into tbe negative 
 
 'TVut the yerb, in the following .entenoee, into the interrogaUye 
 
 'T'DietinguUh the different part, of .peech. and parse them. a. 
 
 '" rCyou ' "W me. Jame. studies grammar 
 Yoli feffias come. He wiU go --. ^"^Vf/-- 
 deredatsea. John would eat apples. Apples wiu grow 
 on Ais tree. The horse will run a race. The fox had 
 catched the goose. Babbits eat clover. St^oy over- 
 comes most dSficulties. Labor promotes health. Wedtt^ 
 makes the man. Poverty scatters fnends. The ships sau. 
 ?he sun has set. The Loon rose. The stars wdshme 
 N. B. Let the pupil, make .imilar exereisee for themselves, and 
 parse tbem. 
 
 Lesson 21— Progressive Form of the Active Voice. 
 
 The Peogressive form of the verb is in- 
 flected by prefixing the verb to be, through 
 aU its moods and tenses, to the present par- 
 ticiple; thus, 
 
 Prmknt 1. 1 am writing. 2. Thou art -j^riting, &c. 
 
 Pees piuF. 1 I have been writing. 2. Thou hast been wnUng, <fcc. 
 Pkes. f erf. 1 2. Thou vast writing. Ac. 
 
 pIstPeuf. 1 I had been writing. 2. Thou hadst been writing Ac. 
 TAST rEEF. 1. X writing. 2. Thou shalt be writing, Ac. 
 
 ^STJef. l:i:hSu::mhf;e 2.Thou.BhaUo.wiltha.ebeen 
 been writing. writing, &c. 
 
 In this manner go through the other moods and tenses. 
 
 Note. Verbs which, in the common ^^"^ ^^^P^J f ^jf'J''^;*^! ?S 
 not usually admit the progressive form; thus. "I am loving' (it 
 proper), would mean nothing more than, 1 love. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1. Change the following verbs from the simple into the progrea- 
 »ive form : 
 
\k. 
 
 m 
 
 64, OTEODUOTION TO AlfTALYTICi^L OBA^MMAB. 
 
 ''Toie the foUo^ing. from the pr.gve»lve int. 0.. simpU 
 
 "we are writing, tbey were BingV"^';^*^ '''/eS 
 riding, we rui^ht I w"^ -S;I,-y l^i; ,' ^S^lt 
 t7XS mS r&ee/defending, they 
 
 firet pereon, plural, progreMive form. 
 
 Lesson 28.— Passive Voice. ^ 
 
 The PASSIVE voice is inflected by addmgl 
 the past participle to the auxihary verb to 
 ^through all its moods and tenses ; thus. 
 
 PrL. Am loved. P«,. Wa»,oved. Pa^ ParUU..ei. 
 
 2 
 
 * 8 
 
 Stngutar. 
 
 1. I am loved. 
 
 2. Thou art loved. 
 8. He is loved. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 raEBENT TBN8B. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We are loved. 
 
 2. You are loved. 
 8. They are loved. 
 
 PEESKNT-PBEFKOT TENSB. 
 
 Sign, have. 
 
 1 J 1 We have been loved. 
 
 1. I have been loved. 1. "^^^^^^ ^een loved. 
 
 2. Thou haat been loved. 2. ^« »^aj« been loved. 
 8. He has been loved. »• ^^^y "^^^ "*' 
 
 1. I was loved. 
 
 % Thou wast loved. 
 
 8. He was loved. 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 1. We were loved. 
 
 2. You were loved. 
 8. They were loved. 
 
A.MMA.B. 
 
 e bave learned, 
 [ run, John has 
 they will stand, 
 itudy, we might 
 
 ive into the simple 
 
 they have been 
 e been sleeping, 
 J have been eat- 
 
 defending, they 
 
 8 form; thus, *'W« 
 ee, irregular ; wriUy 
 . indicative, active, 
 
 oice* 
 
 od by adding 
 dliary verb to 
 tenses; thus, 
 
 Patt Part^ Loved. 
 
 3ved. 
 loved, 
 loved. 
 
 been loved, 
 e been loved, 
 ve been loved. 
 
 Q loved, 
 pe loved. 
 9re loved. 
 
 PA.BSIYE TOICE. 
 PACT PKEFEOT TENBl!. 
 
 Sign, had, 
 
 , J 1 We had been loved. 
 
 1. I had been loved • ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 2. Thou hadst been loved. ^. ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 8. He had been loved. ». i"«j 
 
 FUTOEE TKN8B. 
 
 Signs, Ml ti,i«.-Inflect xvith each. 
 „, , °i 1 We shall be loved. 
 
 1. 1 shall be loved. 2 You shall be loved. 
 
 a. Thou Bhalt be loved. 2- ^^l\^^^^ ^e loved. 
 
 «. He shall be loved. »• ^""J 
 
 FUTUEK-PKEIKCT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, Ml have, will Aai;».-Inflect vrith each. 
 oiguB, •' , , 1 We shall have been loved. 
 
 1. I shall have been loved. 1. ^^^^^^^^ y^^^^ been loved, 
 
 2. Thou Shalt have been loved. 2. You^BhaU have ^^^^^^ 
 8. He shall have been loved. 8. Ihey snaii nav 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 FRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Sign,, ma,, c.«.m«.«.-Me^^ «*«»*• 
 
 ' PEESENT-PBRFEOT TENSE. 
 
 He may have been loved. 8. ihey may nave uoc« 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 Signs, might, cmld, would, .Aoti/A-Mect with each. 
 T • tf u« \L^A 1. We might be loved. 
 
 tTu' mXrt be'loved. I You mi|bt be l.y.d 
 
 :: ^mi^fto loved. 8. They might be lored. 
 
 FABT-FEEFEOT TENSE. 
 
 Signs, might have, could have, would have, should Aaw.-Inflect 
 ^ " with each. 
 
 i. I mi^ht have been loved. . 1. ?* ""fl^A^Jl'^fr^Ti 
 Thonmtehttt have been iovea. a. lou migut .i=t= .j-— -r- --; 
 Bto mrgfi have been loved. 8. They might have been loved. 
 
■ill 
 
 ee 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 mpiHHii'' 
 
 lOTBODirOTION 10 ANALMICAL OEAMMAR. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
 
 Singular ""'" ™' C6'«i>n..eW^^^^^ 
 
 2. // thou be loved. 9 I ^^ ^^ ^P^®^' 
 
 8. 1/ he be loved. o* £ ^f" ^^« ^?^^d. 
 
 3. If they be loved. 
 
 PAST TKNss {Subjunctive form)* 
 l.Jfl were loved. i /^ ^ 
 
 2. //• thou were or wert loved I' If ^^'^ ^?''^^- 
 S. If he were loved '^^'*' o' % Xf " ^^''^ \«^ed. 
 
 8. If they were loved. 
 
 Singular, 
 2; Be thou loved. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Plural. 
 2. Be ye or you loved. 
 
 PreBent. To be loved. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Perf To have been loved. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present, Beiag loved. p^,^^ j^^^^^ 
 
 Perfect, Having been loved. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 1 Tell th ^'^ '^* Pamve Voice. 
 
 words in the paSv; TZtl'S' T '^-T*'; °^ *^« ^^"owing 
 ^^ 2. Go over the exeSTt«?n^ ^S^"" '"*^ *^« ^^^^ive form. ^ 
 
 thus ^^Theyru a p'onrn o?Te'tMrd LT ''^'^ ^''^ ^° o^'^^^'; 
 wme). m the riomfnative nlnr^l r ^1®.^^°°' masculine (or fem- 
 ^ot;*<i"isaverb,traSe ?S ^^ "i^'l'",^ ^^ ^''^ ^'>«^'^; "are 
 person, plural, Uuat Is' ufc^^^^^^^^ P«««ive, third 
 
 Thftv o,.« 7 J ouuject, ;/i<?y, ,g third person, n^ura] 
 
 • ■■'ti 
 
lEBEGULAB VEBLB. 
 
 67 
 
 TT« n^r^ be loved ; thou mayst be loved ; she must be 
 
 Biv6 form. 
 
 EXERCISE n. 
 0„ rt. ;«,»». Article, Adjective, Pr«.<m«. f «'». P'«"^^^^ 
 
 proper or common— and why ;— smguiar or pi 
 ^rhSua^'elHslesson. I loved him because he was 
 good! A good man will forgive those who p^aj have m- 
 fwed him. Love your enemies ; do good to them that 
 C« vnu Eemember your Creator in the days of your 
 ; ulh^rVfaTc^mmlnded to We our^^^^ 
 ourselves. That book was printed in New Tork. ine 
 wiSer has been cold, but the ground was covered w^th 
 low Columbus discovered America. Amenca was 
 dle^iered b^Columbus. I have been studying gram- 
 mar It is never too kte to learn that which is good 
 Td^nsefid Peter Parley has written some pleasing 
 books. Good boys love riding. Study to understand 
 
 what you read. ,_ j • ^^a^^ 
 
 4. Go over the preceding Exercise, and parse each word m order, 
 as directed in preceding Exercises. 
 
 N B-It will now be important to review thoroughly and re- 
 peatedly from Lessen 23.pa?ticularly Lessons 28, 26. and 28 w^^^^^ 
 fh^Ucises under them. This rl^-Zr^oToirw^^^^^^^^ 
 
 t^^, ^^t^rm:m£7^eifrc5ul^ -^^^ '^^ -^ 
 portions daily as the teacher may direct. 
 
r 
 
 >■*%■<' 
 
 
 
 ^ INTEODFCTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAB. 
 
 Lesson ^Q,— Irregular Verba, 
 
 1. An Irregular Verb is one that does not 
 lorm both its^j^^^ tense ^nA past participle bv 
 adding ^c^ to the present ; as. Am, was, been 
 
 Prefent 
 
 Abide 
 
 Am 
 
 Arise 
 
 Awake 
 
 Bake 
 
 Bear, to 
 
 Bear, to 
 
 Beat 
 
 Begin 
 
 Bend 
 
 Bereave 
 
 Beseech 
 
 Bid 
 
 Bind vn* 
 
 Bite 
 
 Bleed 
 
 Blow 
 
 Break 
 
 Breed 
 
 Bric^^ 
 
 Build re* 
 
 Bum 
 
 Burst 
 
 Buy 
 
 Oast 
 
 Oatch 
 
 Ohide 
 
 Ohoose 
 
 Oleave, to 
 
 Cleave, to 
 
 Oling 
 
 Clothe 
 
 Come be- 
 
 Cost 
 
 Crow 
 
 Creep 
 
 Past. 
 abode 
 was 
 arose 
 awoke r* 
 baked 
 bring forth bare or bore 
 
 carry 
 
 adhere 
 split 
 
 bore or bare 
 
 beat 
 
 began 
 
 bent E 
 
 bereft 
 
 besought 
 
 bade, bid 
 
 bound 
 
 bit 
 
 bled 
 
 blew 
 
 broke, brake 
 
 bred 
 
 brought 
 
 built B 
 
 burnt(% 
 
 burst 
 
 bought 
 
 cast 
 
 caught R 
 
 chid 
 
 chose 
 
 clave E 
 
 clove or cleft 
 
 clung 
 
 clothed, clad 
 
 came 
 
 cost 
 
 crew E 
 
 crept 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 abode 
 
 been 
 
 arisen 
 
 awaked 
 
 baken a 
 
 bom 
 
 borne 
 
 beaten or beat 
 
 begun 
 
 bent E 
 
 bereft e 
 
 besought 
 
 bidden, bid 
 
 bound 
 
 bitten, bit 
 
 bled 
 
 blown' 
 
 broken, broke 
 
 bred 
 
 brought 
 
 built E 
 
 burnt E 
 
 burst 
 
 bought 
 
 cast 
 
 caught R 
 
 diidden, chid 
 
 chosen 
 
 cleaved 
 
 cloven or cleft 
 
 clang 
 
 clad E 
 
 come 
 
 cost 
 
 crowed 
 
 crept 
 
 * Those verbs which are coniuirated 
 larly, are marked with an B. ^ 
 
 regularly as well as irregu- 
 
GBAMMAB. 
 
 IEBBGUI1A.B TEBBS. 
 
 5 that does not 
 ^participle by 
 Im^ was^ been. 
 
 i8t Participle. 
 
 3D 
 
 sen 
 
 aked 
 
 sen a 
 
 •n 
 
 ne 
 
 ten or beat 
 
 UQ 
 tE 
 
 eft& 
 
 DUght 
 
 [Jen, bid 
 
 nd 
 
 en, bit 
 
 I 
 
 m' 
 
 :eD, broke 
 
 I 
 
 ight 
 
 bK 
 
 ttB 
 t 
 
 :bt 
 
 htB 
 
 ien, chid 
 
 m 
 
 '^ed 
 
 n or olefb 
 
 B 
 
 )d 
 
 !0ut 
 
 Dare, to venture 
 "Daxe, to challenge, 
 
 Deal 
 
 Dig . 
 
 Do mts- ti«- 
 
 Draw 
 
 Dream 
 
 Drink 
 ; Drive 
 -| Dwell 
 lEat 
 
 ^Fall be- 
 peed 
 f;,iFeel 
 
 Fight 
 
 Find 
 
 Flee 
 
 ;3Fling 
 
 K 
 orbear 
 
 brget 
 
 orsake 
 
 i*reeze 
 
 Jet be- for- 
 
 Hid 
 
 Hrd be- en- 
 tire for- mis- 
 fOo 
 
 lOrave en- & 
 [Grind 
 |Grow 
 [Hang 
 [Have 
 [Hear 
 
 Heave 
 
 Hew 
 
 Hide 
 
 Hit 
 
 Hold be- mth- 
 
 Hurt 
 
 Keep 
 
 Kneel 
 
 Knit 
 
 Pait. 
 
 cut 
 durst 
 is B dared 
 dealt B 
 dug B 
 did 
 drew 
 
 ' dreamt b 
 drank 
 drove 
 dwelt B 
 ate, eat 
 fell 
 fed 
 felt, 
 fought 
 found 
 fled 
 flung 
 flew 
 forbore 
 
 forgot 
 
 forsook 
 
 froze 
 
 gat or got 
 
 gilt B 
 
 girt B 
 
 gave 
 
 went 
 
 graved 
 
 ground 
 
 grew 
 
 hung 
 
 had 
 
 heard 
 *" hove B 
 
 hewed 
 
 hid 
 
 hit 
 
 held 
 
 hurt 
 
 kept 
 
 knelt B 
 knitB 
 
 Past Participle, 
 
 cut 
 
 dared 
 
 dared 
 
 dealt B 
 
 dugB 
 
 done 
 
 drawn 
 
 dreamt b 
 
 drunk 
 
 driven 
 
 dwelt B 
 
 eaten 
 
 fallen 
 
 fed 
 
 felt 
 
 fought 
 
 found 
 
 fled 
 
 flung 
 
 flown 
 
 forborne 
 
 forgotten, forgot 
 
 forsaken 
 
 frozen 
 
 gotten or got 
 
 gilt B 
 
 girt B 
 
 given 
 
 gone 
 
 graven b 
 
 ground 
 
 grown 
 
 hung* 
 
 had 
 
 heard 
 
 hoven b 
 
 hewn B 
 
 hidden, hid 
 
 hit 
 
 held or holden 
 
 hurt 
 
 kept 
 
 knelt B 
 
 knit or knitted 
 
 * ffang, to take away life by hanging, is regular ; as. The rob- 
 ber was hanged, but the gown was hung up. 
 
70 INTEODUOTIOW TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAB. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Know 
 
 Lade 
 
 Lay 
 
 Lead mi»- 
 
 Leave 
 
 Lend 
 
 Let 
 
 Lie, to lie down 
 
 Light 
 
 Load 
 
 Lose 
 
 Make 
 
 Mean 
 
 Meet 
 
 Mow 
 
 Payr«. 
 
 Fen, to inclose 
 
 Put 
 
 Quit 
 
 Bead 
 
 Rend 
 
 Kid 
 
 Ride 
 
 Ring 
 
 Rise a- 
 
 Rive 
 
 Run 
 
 Saw 
 
 Say 
 
 See 
 
 Seek 
 
 Seethe 
 
 Sell 
 
 Send 
 
 Set be- 
 
 Shake 
 
 Shape mt<- 
 
 Shave 
 
 Shear 
 
 Shed 
 
 Shine 
 
 Shoe 
 
 Shoot 
 
 Past. 
 
 knew 
 
 laded 
 
 laid 
 
 led 
 
 left 
 
 lent 
 
 let 
 
 lay 
 
 lighted or lit 
 
 loaded 
 
 lost 
 
 made 
 
 meant 
 
 met 
 
 mowed 
 
 paid 
 
 pent R 
 
 put 
 
 quit a 
 
 read 
 
 rent 
 
 rid 
 
 rode 
 
 rang or rung 
 
 rose 
 
 rived 
 
 ran 
 
 sawed 
 
 said 
 
 saw 
 
 Bought 
 
 sod B 
 
 sold 
 
 sent 
 
 set 
 
 shook 
 
 shaped 
 
 shaved 
 
 shore r 
 
 shed 
 
 shone e 
 
 shod 
 
 shot 
 
 Past Participle, 
 
 known 
 
 laden 
 
 laid 
 
 led 
 
 left 
 
 lent 
 
 let 
 
 lain or lien 
 
 lighted or lit 
 
 laden e 
 
 lost 
 
 made 
 
 meant 
 
 met 
 
 mown E 
 
 paid 
 
 pent R 
 
 put 
 
 quitE 
 
 read 
 
 rent 
 
 rid 
 
 rode, ridden* 
 
 rung 
 
 risen 
 
 riven B 
 
 run 
 
 sawn E 
 
 said 
 
 seen 
 
 sought 
 
 sodden e 
 
 sold 
 
 sent 
 
 set 
 
 shaken 
 
 shapen e 
 
 shaven e 
 
 shorn 
 
 shed 
 
 shone e 
 
 shod 
 
 shot 
 
 SI 
 
 SI 
 
 ;S] 
 
 [Si 
 
 (Bi 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 « THJJ. 
 
 -snacwTTi IS neany ouaolete. 
 
IRREGULAB VERBS. 
 
 71 
 
 Present. 
 
 Show* 
 Shrink 
 J Shred 
 [Shut 
 
 [Sing 
 Sink 
 Sit 
 Slay 
 Sleep 
 Slide 
 i Sling 
 Slink 
 [Slit 
 ISraite 
 fSow 
 Speak be- 
 [Speed 
 Spell 
 
 tSpend miS' 
 hpill 
 
 )pin 
 
 3pit be- 
 
 Split 
 
 Spread be- 
 
 Spring 
 
 Stand with- &c. 
 
 Steal 
 
 Stick 
 ; Sting 
 
 Stride be- 
 
 Strike 
 '-^ String 
 
 Strive 
 
 Strew^: be- 
 
 Strow be- 
 
 Swear 
 
 Sweat 
 
 Sweep 
 
 Swell 
 
 Swim 
 
 Swing 
 
 Take be- &c. 
 
 Past 
 
 ehowed 
 
 shrank or shrunk 
 
 shred 
 
 shut 
 
 sang or sung 
 
 sank or sunk 
 
 sat 
 
 slew 
 
 slept 
 
 slid 
 
 slang, slung 
 
 slunk 
 
 slit 
 
 smote 
 
 sowed 
 
 spoke or spake 
 
 sped 
 
 spelt R 
 
 spent 
 
 spilt R 
 
 span, spun 
 
 spat, spit 
 
 split 
 
 spread 
 
 sprang or sprung 
 
 stood 
 
 stole 
 
 stuck 
 
 stung 
 
 strode or strid 
 
 struck 
 
 strung 
 
 strove 
 
 strewed 
 
 strowed 
 
 swore, aware 
 
 sweat R 
 
 swept 
 
 swelled 
 
 swam or swum 
 
 swung 
 
 took 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 shown R 
 
 shrunk 
 
 shred 
 
 shut 
 
 sung 
 
 sunk 
 
 sat or sittenf 
 
 slain 
 
 slept 
 
 slidden, slid 
 
 slung 
 
 slunk 
 
 slit or slitted 
 
 smitten 
 
 sown R 
 
 spoken 
 
 sped 
 
 spelt R 
 
 spent 
 
 spilt R 
 
 spun 
 
 spit 
 
 split 
 
 spread 
 
 sprung 
 
 stood 
 
 stolen 
 
 stuck 
 
 stung 
 
 stridden 
 
 struck, stricken 
 
 strung 
 
 striven 
 
 strewed or 
 
 strown, strowed 
 
 sworn 
 
 sweat R 
 
 swept 
 
 swollen R 
 
 swum 
 
 swung 
 
 taken 
 
 * Shew, shewed, shewn, — pronounced show, <fec. 
 f Bitten and spitten are nearly obsolete. 
 
 I Strew and «A«o are now giving way to strow and «Aow, as they 
 are pronounced. 
 

 72 
 
 in 
 
 m sd Axi 
 
 x.ui\/xr t^ VAAvrj.1 ^\f j^i.tj^ 
 
 
 ,. ^. — ^«. ,y^ 
 
 Present, 
 
 Pott. 
 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Teach mt«- 
 
 re- taught 
 
 
 taught 
 
 Tear tin- 
 
 tore or tare 
 
 
 torn 
 
 Tell 
 
 told 
 
 
 told 
 
 ThiDk he- 
 
 thought 
 
 
 thought 
 
 Thrive 
 
 throve r 
 
 
 thriven r 
 
 Throw 
 
 threw 
 
 
 thrown 
 
 Thrust 
 
 thrust 
 
 
 thrust 
 
 Tread 
 
 trod 
 
 
 trodden, trod 
 
 Wax 
 
 waxed 
 
 
 waxen r 
 
 Wear 
 
 wore 
 
 
 worn 
 
 Weave 
 
 wove 
 
 
 woven ^ 
 
 Weep 
 
 wept 
 
 
 wept ■ 
 
 Wet 
 
 wet R 
 
 
 wet R H 
 
 Whet 
 
 whet R 
 
 
 whet R fl 
 
 Win 
 
 won 
 
 
 won H 
 
 Wind 
 
 wound B 
 
 
 wound ■ 
 
 Work 
 
 wrought R 
 
 
 wrought, worked 9 
 
 Wring 
 
 wrung R 
 
 
 wrung H 
 
 Write 
 
 wrote 
 
 
 written H 
 
 Obs. The 
 
 preceding list contains 
 
 nearly all the simple irregular 9 
 
 verba in the 
 
 English language 
 
 
 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 
 What is an irregular verb t Are any verba both regular and 
 irregular t Give an example. Since there is no list of regular 
 verbs, how may we know what verbs are regular ? Is " am " regor' 
 lar or irregular — and why I 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. Name the past tense and past participle of the following verbs; 
 Thus, Take, took, taken. [This is called conjugatin;?, the verb.] 
 
 2. Make a short ser.tence on the slate or blac! board, with each 
 verb, in the present teoi^e — in the perfect tense -va the past tense 
 — in any tense ; thus. We take breakfast early. Jiihn took my hat. 
 I have taken his coat. 
 
 Take, drive, creep, begin, abide, buy, brmg, arisC) 
 
 catch, bereave, am, burst, draw, drink, fly, ii. i^, fall, get, 
 
 give, go, feel, forsake, grow, have, hear, hide, keep, know, 
 
 lose, pay, ride, ring, shake, run, seek, sell, see, sit, slay, 
 
 slide, smite, speak, stand, tell, win, write 
 
 8. In the sentences made as directed. No. 2, toll which verbs are 
 transitive, and which are intransitive — and why. Poiat out the sub* 
 ject in each sentence, that is, the person or thing spoken of, and 
 
}BAMHAB. 
 
 ast Participle, 
 
 ught 
 
 pn 
 
 Id 
 
 ought 
 
 riven k 
 
 rown 
 
 rust 
 
 >dden, trod 
 
 ixeD K 
 
 )rn 
 
 )ven 
 
 jpt 
 
 it& 
 
 let a 
 
 >Q 
 
 mod 
 
 ■ought, worked 
 
 •ung 
 
 :itteQ 
 
 he simple irregular 
 
 m both regular and 
 
 no list of regular 
 
 ar? Is "am" r^fu-* 
 
 the folio wing verbs ; 
 jatin;^ ihe verb.] 
 
 icli board, with each 
 
 - vui the past tense 
 
 John took my hat. 
 
 ly, briag, arisei 
 ly, jil. e, fall, get, 
 ide, keep, know, 
 ill, see, sit, slay, 
 
 te 
 
 iili which verbs are 
 Poiat out the sub- 
 bing spoken of, and 
 
 DEFECTITE AND IMPEHSOKAL VEEBS. 
 
 73 
 
 i-call that the nominative. Tell which nouns or pronouns are m the 
 ^t .nominative-and why ;-in the objective-and why. 
 
 4 In each sentence, put the verb in the emphatic form— in the 
 
 progressive form--ia the negative form-in the interrogative form 
 
 —in the negative interrogative form. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. In the following Exercise, point out which verbs are regular, 
 and which are irregular— and why. 
 
 2 Make short sentences with each verb, as in the preceding 
 Exercise, and do with each as there directed, m Nos. 2, 3, 4. 
 
 Love, hope, trust, weep, throw, keep, brush, hunt, 
 <jount, reckon, ask, sleep, eat, drink, spin, save, go, 
 Ifceach, wipe, am, draw, bruise, water, know, wash, spoil. 
 
 8 Take the sentences containing transitive verbs, and express the 
 ■same idea by the passive form ; thus, suppose the sentence to be 
 I James loves praise ;" passive form, "Praise is loved by James. 
 
 4. Parse the sentences so changed. 
 
 liesson 30. — Defective and Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 Deeective verbs are those in which some 
 i)f the parts are wanting. They are irregu- 
 lar, and chiefly auxiliary. These are, — 
 
 ^resent. 
 
 )an 
 
 _ lay 
 
 fMust 
 
 ■Ought 
 
 ,>r^uoth 
 
 Past. 
 
 could 
 might 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 r 
 
 jts^ 
 
 quoth 
 
 7^ 
 
 Present. 
 Shall 
 Will 
 Wis 
 Wit or ) 
 Wot S 
 
 Past. 
 should 
 would 
 wist 
 
 wot 
 
 Past Part, 
 
 Imperative, — Beware. 
 
 2. Impersonal verbs are those which 
 assert the existence of some action or state, 
 but refer it to no particular subject. They 
 are preceded by the pronoun it, and are al- 
 ways in the third person singular; as, U 
 seems, it becomes, &c. 
 
74 
 
 INTBODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAE. 
 
 To this head may be referred such expressions as, It hails, ii 
 snow8f it rains, it thunders, it behooveth, it irketh ; and perhapg 
 also, methink, methought, meseems, meaeemed, in which, instead of 
 t7, the first personal pronoun in the objective case, tnCf is prefixed 
 to the third person singular of the verb. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is a defecti 76 verb ? Are they regular or irregular ? What 
 are they ? What tenses do the most of them have ? What tense 
 has must ? — ought ? Is it proper to say, " I had ought to read t " 
 "Why ? What is an impersonal verb ? By what are they preceded! 
 In what person and number are they ? What sort of words are 
 methinks, meseems, &q, t 
 
 ii^ 
 
 "fa' 
 
 ■' 
 
 1 I 
 
 ml 
 
 •■ #il ! i I 
 
 Lesson 31. — Adverbs. 
 [Review the preceding Lesson.] 
 
 An Advekb is a word joined to a rt'r^, an^ 
 adjective, or another adverb, to modify it, or 
 to denote some circumstance respecting it ; 
 as, Ann speaks distinctly ; she is remarkably 
 diligent, and reads very correctly. 
 
 Adverbs have been divided into various classes, according to 
 their signification. The chief of these are such as denote, 
 
 I. Quality or Manner simply ; as, well, illy bravely, prudently^ 
 softly^ with innumerable others, formed from adjectives by adding 
 iy, or changing le into ly ; thus, tame, tamely ; sensible, sensibly, <fec. 
 
 2. Place ; as, here, there, where : Jiither, thither ; hence^ &c. 
 
 3. Time ; as, now, then, when ; soon, often, seldom ; ever, <fec. 
 
 4. Direction ; as, upward, downward, backward, forward, Ac. 
 
 5. Negation ; as, nay, no, not, nowise, never. 
 
 6. Affirmation ; as, verily, truly, undoubtedly, yea, yes. 
 
 7. Uncertainty ; as, perhaps, peradventure, perchance, 
 
 8. Interrogation ; as, how, why, when, wherefore, &c. 
 
 9. Comparison ; as, more, most ; less, least ; as, so, thus, &c. 
 10. Quantity; as, much, little, enough, sufficiently, 
 
 II. Order; fi%, first, secondly, thirdly, <fec. 
 
 12. Conjunctive Adverbs ; as, when, where, how, while, &c. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 1 . The chief use of adverbs is to shoi ten discourse, by expressing 
 
OBAMMAB. 
 
 isBioDB as, It hails, it 
 irketh; and perhaps 
 , in which, iDstead of 
 case, 7ntf, ia prefixed 
 
 ' or irregular ? What 
 have ? What tens* 
 ad ought to read?" 
 t are they preceded! 
 at sort of words are 
 
 ADVEBBS. 
 
 75 
 
 >n.] ^ 
 
 [ to a ':erby an 
 ) modify it, or 
 respecting it ; 
 is remarkably 
 tly. 
 
 lasses, according to 
 ih as denote, 
 
 , bravely, prudently, 
 idjectives by adding 
 tengible, iensihly, <&c, 
 
 hither ; hence^ &c. 
 
 seldom ; ever, <fec. 
 
 Dardf forward^ Ac. 
 
 r. 
 
 *dly, yea, yes. 
 
 f, perchance. 
 
 irefore^ &c. 
 
 ; as, sOy thus, kc, 
 
 iently, 
 
 how, while, &c. 
 
 ourse, by expressing 
 
 in one word what would otherwise require two or more ; as, here^ 
 for " in this place ;" nobly, for '♦ in a noble manner," &o. 
 
 2 Some adverbs admit of comparison like adjectives ; as, soon, 
 Sooner, soonest; nobly, more nobly, most nobly. A' fe.^ are com- 
 pared irregularly; as u>ell, better, best; badly, or til, worse w<yrst 
 
 3. Some words become adverbs by prefixmg a, which signifies 
 i/, or on ; as, abed, ashore, afloat, aground, apart. ^, , . 
 : 4. In comparison, the antecedents as and so are usually reckoned 
 idverbs; the corresponding as and so are adverbs also; thus. It 
 
 ll as high as Heaven. 
 
 : Circumstances of time, place, manner, <fec., are often expressed 
 two or more words constituting an adverbial phrase ; as, tn short, 
 w fine, in general, at most, at least, at length, not at all, by no means, 
 In vain, in order, long ago, bye and bye, to and fro, &c., which, taken 
 gether, may be parsed as adverbs, or by supplying the ellipsis ; 
 lUB, in a short space: in a general way, &c. 
 6. A Conjunctive Adverb stands for two adjuncts, one of which 
 --ntains a relative pronoun, and the other its antecedent; as, "I 
 )m see you when you come, i. e., •' at the time at which:* Tell me 
 j|0o it is doneP i. e. the manner in which. 
 
 , Pausing.— An adverb is parsed by stating 
 is class, and the word which it modifies ; 
 ^us, 
 
 "Ann speaks distinctly ." Distinctly is an adverb of manner, and 
 Modifies '^ speaks." 
 
 ; QUESTIONS. 
 
 *t What is an adverb? In the sentence, "Ann speaks distinctly," 
 lihich is the adverb ? Why ? Into how many classes are adverbs 
 Commonly divided 1 Name the first three— the second three—the 
 iiext three— the last three. How are adjectives changed mto 
 adverbs? What is the chief use of adverbs? Are any adverbs 
 jompared like adjectives ? Give an example. Are any compared 
 irregularly ? Give an example. What is an adverbial phrase \ ^ 
 iive examples. How are such phrases to be parsed ? How are 
 .dverbs parsed ? For what do conjunctive adverbs stand ? 
 
 EAiliivVJiOJli 1. 
 
 1. In the following list of adverbs, point out the class to which 
 ^ach belongs. 
 
76 
 
 INTEODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAB. 
 
 m 
 
 ill 
 
 .<! -' 
 
 2. Compare those that admit of oomp«' *, 'y, 
 
 8. Make a number of short sentences, each of which i^Bill eon. 
 tain one or more of the adverbs in the following list ; and parse the 
 sentences so made. 
 
 Here, there, softly, boldly, wisely, seldom, upward, 
 once, twice, hitherto, yesterday, bow, more, little, se- 
 condly, enough, perhaps, yes, no, truly, not, already, 
 hence, wbence, better, sufficiently, wisely, somewhere, 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1, In the following sentences, tell what words are articles — what 
 words are nouns, and why — adjectives, and why — pronouns, and 
 why — verbs, and why — whether transitive or intransitive, and why 
 —regular or irregular, and why. 
 
 2. Which words are adverbs ? — and why I What words do tlipy 
 modify ? Parse. 
 
 Peter wept bitterly. He is here now. She went away 
 yesterday. They came to-day. They will perhaps buy 
 some to-morrow. Ye shall know hereafter. She sang 
 sweetly. Cats soon learn to catch mice. Mary rose up 
 hastily. They that have enough may soundly sleep. 
 Cain wickedly slew his brother. I saw him long ago. 
 He is a very good man. Sooner or later all must die. 
 You read too little. They talk too much. 
 
 Xiesson 32. — Prepositions. 
 
 A Preposition is a word which shows the 
 relation between a noun or a pronoun follow- 
 ing it, and some other word in the sentence ; 
 as, 
 
 ''Before honor is humility." "They speak concerning virtue." 
 In these sentences, the preposition, " be/ore" points out the rela- 
 tion between *' honor" and " humility ;" and " concerning'* pointa 
 out the relation between "virtue" and "speak." 
 
 Note. — Instead of a noun or pronoun, a preposition may be fol- 
 lowed by an infiaitive mood, a phrase, or clause of a sentence, used 
 "as a substantive ; as, " We are about to depart." — " Honored for 
 having done his duty!* — **The crime of being a young man}* An. 
 & Pr. Gr, 540. 
 
mAMMAB. 
 
 [)f v'hich bi)all con- 
 ; list ; and parse th« 
 
 seldom, upward, 
 
 more, little, se- 
 
 ly, not, already, 
 
 3ely, somewhere, 
 
 I are articles — what 
 hy — pronouus, and 
 transitive, and why 
 
 iVhat words do thej 
 
 She went away 
 vill perhaps buy 
 after. She sang 
 . Mary rose up 
 ' soundly sleep, 
 w him long ago. 
 ter all must die. 
 sh. 
 
 ch shows the 
 moun follow- 
 he sentence; 
 
 concerning virtue." 
 points out the rela- 
 concerning'* points 
 
 )OBition may be fol- 
 
 ! of a sentence, used 
 
 rt." — " Honored for 
 
 young man." Ad. 
 
 pliEPOSITIONS. 
 
 77 
 
 The principle word« of this class are contained in the following- 
 LIST OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 From Through 
 
 T Throughout 
 
 Into Till 
 
 Notwithstanding To 
 
 About 
 
 Above 
 j| Across 
 >After 
 '' Against 
 1 Along 
 I Amid ) 
 ■} Amidst S 
 
 AmonfT I 
 
 Amongst J 
 
 Around 
 
 At 
 
 Athwart 
 
 Bating 
 I^Before 
 fltBehind 
 
 m 
 
 Below 
 Beneath 
 Beside ) 
 Besides ) 
 Between 
 Betwixt 
 Beyond 
 But 
 
 S^ • 
 Concernmg 
 
 Down 
 
 During 
 
 Ere 
 
 Except 
 
 Excepting 
 
 For 
 
 Of 
 
 Off 
 
 On 
 
 Out of 
 
 Over 
 
 Past 
 
 Pending 
 
 Regarding 
 
 RespeclitJg 
 
 Round 
 
 Save 
 
 Since 
 
 OP 
 
 Touchin^ 
 Toward ) 
 Towards } 
 Under 
 Underneath 
 
 Until 
 Unto 
 
 Up 
 
 Upon 
 
 With 
 
 Within 
 
 Without 
 
 AWti 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 1 Every preposition requires the noun or pronoun after it to be 
 In mLUco... When any word in the precedmg hs o 
 pot govern an objective case, it becomes an adverb; as. He ridea 
 
 2 But iDSUch , rases as cast up, hold out, fall on, the words 
 uptout. m. may be considered as a part of the verb, rather than as 
 
 prepositions or adverbs. . n j 4U« 
 
 8 Of the words related, that before the preposition is called he 
 antecedent term of the relation ; and that which follows it is called 
 the mUequent term, or the regimen of the preposition, because 
 governed by it in the objective case. 
 
 Parsing.— The preposition is parsed by 
 stating what part of speech, and the words 
 between which it shows the relation ; thus, 
 
 "Before honor is humility." -Before** is a preposition, and 
 Bhows the relation between " honor," and " humility. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is a preposition? In what case is the noun oj pr^onoun 
 after a preposition ? W heu au oDjeciive uoxs ""V^ wV«t' U tL 
 sition, kat part of speech is it to be considered? What is the 
 delated word Wore the preposition called ?-the one after it? 
 
MtKMlMMMHM 
 
 -MM 
 
 78 ITTTEODIIOTIOIT TO ANiLLYTIOAL OEA.MMAE. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Point out the prepositions in the following exercises. 
 
 2. Point out the noun or pronoun after the preposition, and the 
 word to which it is rehited ; thus, •' I went from Albany to New 
 York." The preposition from, stands before Albany, and sliows 
 its relation to the verb, **went.'" So also, to stands before JVeto 
 York, and shows its relation to " went. 
 
 I went from London to Bath. The King walked about 
 the garden with his son. They dined without me. I 
 fell off a ship into the river near (to) the bridge. This 
 box of wafers is for you. Charles put it upon the table 
 against the inkstand. Turn down the lane through the 
 gate. I shall go up the road after him. Bun to that 
 tree near the house. It stands bet-, een the trees. Put 
 it on the table at t^e side of the house. I found the 
 knife among the ashes under the grate. Sit by me. 
 Jobn is at school. They all went except me. 
 
 8* Parse the words in preceding Exercises. 
 
 Xiesson 33. — Interjections. 
 
 An Interjection is a word used in ex- 
 clamations, to express some emotion of the 
 mind ; as, Oh ! what a sight is here ! Well 
 done! 
 
 A LIST OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Adieu ! ah ! alas ! alack ! away ! aha ! be- 
 gone! hark! ho! ha! he! hail! halloo! hum! 
 hush ! huzza ! hist ! heydey ! lo ! O ! Oh ! 
 strange ! O brave ! pshaw ! see ! well-a-day ! 
 &c. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 i. The Interjection is thrown in among the other words in a sen- 
 tence, but does not affect their construction. 
 
 2. O is used to express wishing or exclamation, and should be 
 prefixed only lo a noun or a pronoun, in a direct address; as, *' O 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 79 
 
 . TT -.Wfl thou art**' OA is used detached from the 
 
 irir; 'r e'i: Jln after it It i.pUe. an e.noU.a 
 TfplT Borrow, or surprise -, a,, " Oh , what a ..ght u l,ere^ 
 
 PAnsiNG.-Interjectioas are parsed by 
 naming them as such, statmg why, and the 
 emotion expressed. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 What is an /n.er;..^on; Name-me^^^^^ f^Ts^i^t 
 
 wriTing them ? How are interjections parsed? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1. Point out the Interjections in the Exereises. 
 S. Name all the other parts of speech, and parse them 
 Hah ! I am glad to see you. Well-a-day ! I j^d not 
 expect ihis Alas II am ruined. Indeed! is that true? 
 WhatV sit possible? Lot there he is., ^^"^l^t 
 ^t think so.^ O what a benefit education is ! Ah ! you 
 are a happy fellow. Hush ! what was that ? ^ffioor 
 how laughable that is 1 Ho ! come this way. f ^] PO^J 
 feZw, he is to be pitied. Hurrah ! we have finished our 
 lesson. Come ! now for the next. 
 
 Lesson S4'^Conjunctions. 
 
 A Conjunction is a word wMdi connects 
 words, phrases, or sentences ; as, 
 
 « You and I must study ; 6«« he may go and ply." "J^J^^U 
 two make four." Of him. and through him, and to him, are au 
 things. 
 
 Conjunctions are of two kinds ; Copulative 
 and Disjunctive* 
 
 •■I 
 
 m 
 
' ""•'" ■ iwmr ii wi ii n nj n j 
 
 f 
 
 SO INTEODXTCTIOlSr TO ANALYTICAL GHAMMAB. 
 
 A LIST OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1 Copulative.— Also, and, because, both, 
 for,'if, since, that, then, therefore, wherefore. 
 
 2. Dlsjunctive.— Although, as, as well 
 as, but, either, except, lest, neither, nor, not- 
 withstanding, or, provided, so, than, though, 
 unless, whether, yet, still. 
 
 Ona The copulative conjunctions connect things that are to be 
 taken%o^''^'r; a' "You ind I (i. e. both of us) must go." The 
 dliunct've conjunctions connect things that are to be taken sepor 
 S or one to the exclusion of the rest; as. " You or I (.. e. the 
 one or the other, but not both) must go. 
 
 Pabsing.— Conjunctions are parsed by 
 stating to what class they belong, and the 
 words or sentences which they join togeth* 
 er; thus, 
 
 *' You and I must study." And is a conjunction, copulative, and 
 connects You and Z. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 W^it is a conjunction? How many kinds of conjunctions are- 
 there ? What are the copulative ?— the disjunctive ? How do these 
 two clv^&ea differ ? How ure conjunctions parsed ? 
 
 EXERCISES, 
 
 1, Point out the conjunctions in the following Exercise, the class 
 to which each belongs, and the words which they connect. 
 
 2. Parse all the words in order. 
 
 Henry and Charles read their lessons. I or he will 
 be there. I will be with you unless you call. I slept 
 well though the dog barked. Head that you may learn. 
 John says that he will do it. As he writes, so do I read ; 
 for 1 am fond of reading. Neither the boys nor the 
 girls are asleep. I would call if i could, but I can liot. 
 Take care lest you fall. Two and two make four. He 
 is be+ter than I thought he was, though he behaved ill. 
 
,ion, copulative, and 
 
 HOW TO BISTINOXriSH THE PABTS OT SPEECH. SI 
 
 Since that has happened I must go. Do to others a» 
 you would that they should do to you. 
 
 Lesson Sb.-How to distinguish the Parts of Speech. 
 *"" rXother four namely, the noun, adjective, verb, and adverb 
 
 used to qualify a substantive. 
 Sd I W ibi expresses 'bat. person or thing d^^^^^^ or ..or 
 
 4th A Tford that modifle. another by expressing a aronmstance 
 
 of LTplace, manner, &o is an Adverb; because "An adrerb, 
 
 Ac " fSee definition. Lesson 31.J 
 i S The following technical method, though neither very accu- 
 Le nor cer aZ may assist the young pupil in distn.gmshing these 
 lour parts of speech ; but the preceding should always be preferred. 
 1st A word that makes sense after ar. :»;ticle or the phrase « / 
 
 speak o/r is a Noun ; as, A man ; I speak ot money. 
 2d A word that makes sense before the word thing, is commonly 
 
 kn Adjective ; as, A good thing ; an old thmg. 
 8d. A Verb makes sense with /, thou, he, or to before it; as, I 
 
 write ; he vorites ; to teach. 
 4th. The answer to the question. How? When? Where? i^ gene" 
 
 rally an Adverb; as, How do you do? F^ry mil When did 
 
 you aiTive ? Yesterday. Where is your book ? It is here. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Many words are sometimes to be regarded as one part of 
 speech, and sometimes as another, according to their meaning an* 
 use in the place where they are used; thus, 
 
 t T\ i *:..y, Ti^^^MtM . oa <' fJivfi me that book." 
 
 Relative Pronoun; as, "It is the same that I bought. 
 Conjunction ; as, " I am glad that you are come. 
 
 liil 
 
T l'-"t~" 
 
 i :;« 
 
 'iM 
 
 
 f K 
 
 
 ■■?>. 
 
 82 
 
 INTEODUOTION TO AKALTTICAL QEAMMAB. 
 
 ( Jdverb ; as, " It is mnch better to give than to receive." 
 Much, k Adjective; a?, "In much -wisdom is much grief." 
 
 ( Noun ; as, " Where much is given, much is required." 
 
 ( Conjunction ; as, '^Since we must part." 
 Since, k Preposition ; *'>S«ice that time." 
 
 ( Adverb ; as, *' Your friend has gone long since.^* 
 
 ( Conjunction; as, "Poor hnt honest." 
 BtJT, < Preposition ; as, " All but one." 
 
 ( Adverb; as, '* He has hut just enough." 
 
 2. When the same word is sometimes a preposition and some- 
 times a conjunction, let it be remembered that the preposition is 
 followed by an objective case; the conjujction is not." 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 How may we most readily distinguish articles, pronouns, prepo- 
 sitions, conjunctions, and interjections ? How do you distinguish 
 the noun from other parts of speech ? — the adjective ? — the verb ? 
 the adverb ? 
 
 Lesson 36^^^ — Parsing. 
 
 Parsing is the resolving of a sentence 
 into its elements, or parts of speech. Words 
 are parsed two ways; Etymologically and 
 Syntacticallg , 
 
 1. In Etymological parsing the pupil is required to state the 
 part of speech to which a word belongs, and to describe it by its 
 accidents and uses. 
 
 2. In Syntactical parsing, the pupil is required, besides parsing 
 the word etyraologically, to state its relation to other words in the 
 sentence, and the rul** >v which these relations arj governed. 
 
 N". B. Before proce a, jg to Syntax, the pupil should be expert 
 in etymological parcing. This he can hardly fail to be, if he has 
 attended, in the manner directed, to the exerciser already given. 
 The reading lessons in the spelling book, or sentences from any 
 plain writer, may now be analyzed and parsed as already directed. 
 To assist further in this, observe the following 
 
 to 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 In order to parse a S3nteiice, it is 
 understand it. The sentence being 
 
 necessary 
 under- 
 
GEAMMAR. 
 
 HOW TO DISTINGUISH THE PAETS OF SPEECH. 
 
 83 
 
 U 
 
 Stood, in parsing it, let the following general 
 principles be remembered, viz., 
 
 1 Every Article, Adjective, Adjective pronoun, or Participle, be- 
 long8 to some noun or pronoun, expressed or understood _ 
 
 2 The subject of a verb, i.e., the person or thing spoken of is 
 usually in the nominative, and is said to be the « nominative to the 
 
 verb " 
 
 3 'Every noun or pronoun, in the nominative case, when spoken 
 
 of is the subject of a verb, expressed or understood, i.e., it is that 
 of which the verb affirms. To this there are a few exceptions. 
 
 4 Every verb in the indicative, potential, or subjunctive mood, 
 must have a nominative or subject expressed or understood, i.e., 
 something of which it affirms. 
 
 5 Every transitive verb in the active voice, and every preposi- 
 tion governs a noun or pronoun in the objective case; and every 
 objective case is governed by a transitive verb in the active voice, 
 -or by a preposition. 
 
 i 6. Every verb in the infinitive mood is governed by a verb or 
 Ldjective; sometimes by a noun ; and sometimes it stands after 
 j'the conjunction, than or as. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is parsing ? How many kinds of parsing are there ? What 
 is done in etymological parsing ?-in syntactical parsing ? What is 
 necessary before parsing a sentence ? To what does every article 
 lidiective, &c., belong? In what case is the subject of a verb? 
 When a noun or pronoun in the nominative case is spoken of, wha,t 
 must it have ? What must every verb in the indicative, potential, 
 or subjunctive mood have ? What case does every transitive ^erb 
 in the active voice, and eve- preposition, have -^fter it ! By what 
 Is the objective case alwa- joverned? When a verb i3 m the in- 
 finitive mood, by what is it governed ? 
 
 For the answer to the following questions, go back to the pages 
 indicated. 
 
 How is a noun parsed ? p. 18,— an article ? p. 91.— an adjective ? 
 p. 25,— a pronoun? pp. 28, 32, 34,— a verb ? p. 58,— an adverb? p. 
 76,— a preposition? p.'ZT,- an interjection? p. 19,— a conjunction I 
 p. 80. Parse all these as directed in the places referred to, and 
 as described in the next Lesson. 
 
»f/rf 
 
 84 
 
 INTHODirOTION TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAB. 
 
 I 
 
 Xiesson 37. — Model of Etymological Parsing, 
 
 " Give instruction to a wise man, and he will be yet 
 wiser." 
 
 " Give " is a verb, transitive, irregular ; ^rjw, gave, given; in the 
 imperative, active, second person, singular. Its subject is thou 
 understood, and its object, instruction. 
 
 "Instruction" is a noun, neuter, in the objective singular ; the ob- 
 ject of give.* 
 
 " To " is a preposition ; it points out the relation between its object, 
 man, and give. 
 
 "A" is an article, indefinite, belongs to man, 
 
 " "Wise " is an adjective ; compared, toise^ wiser, wisest ; and ex- 
 presses a quality of man, 
 
 " Man " is a noun, masculine, in the objective singular ; pi. men. 
 
 " And " is a conjunction, and connects the clauses. 
 
 "He " is a pronoun of the third person, masculine, in the nomina- 
 tive singular ; the subject of will be, and stands for man. 
 
 " Will be" is a verb, intransitive, irregular; am, was, been; in the 
 future, indicative, third person, singular, and affirms of its 
 subject, ?ie. 
 
 " Yet " is an adverb, modifying wiser. 
 
 " Wiser " is an adjective, comparative degree ; wise, wiser, wisest ; 
 and belongs to 7nan, or is predicated of he. 
 
 As a further exercise, the pupil may be 
 required to give a reason for everything 
 affirmed in the preceding model ; thus, 
 
 Why do you say that give is a verb ? Why transitive ? Why 
 irregular ? Why the imperative ? Why the second person ? Why 
 singular ? 
 
 Why do you say that instruction is a noun ? Why neuter ? Why 
 singular ? Why the objective ? <feo. 
 
 * The person and class of the noun are omitted for reasons stated, 
 Illustrat on, p. 12. 
 
G^BAMMAB. 
 
 EXEEOISES IN PABSlNa. 
 
 85 
 
 ^e singular ; the ob- 
 a between its object. 
 
 ser, wisest ; and ex~ 
 
 wise^ wiser ^ wisest ; 
 
 Why neuter ? Why 
 
 d for reasons stated^ 
 
 Lesson 38, — Exercises in Parsing. 
 
 After the same manner as in the preced- 
 ing Lesson, parse and practise on the fol- 
 lowing Exercises. 
 
 MAXIMS FOR YOUNG AND OLD. 
 I Eablt Piett.— Remember now thy Creator in the 
 days of thy youth ; while the evil days come not, nor 
 the years draw nigh, when thou shalt say, I have no 
 pleasure in them. 
 
 Children, obey your parents ; honor thy father and 
 mother, is the first commandment with promise. 
 
 A wise son heareth a father's instruction, but a scorner 
 heareth not rebuke. The eye that mocketh at his father, 
 and despiseth to obey his mother, the ravens of the val- 
 ley shall pluck out, and the young eagles shall eat it. 
 A wise son maketh a glad father, but a foohsh son is 
 the heaviness of his mother. Whoso loveth instruction 
 loveth knowledge, but he that hateth reproof is brutish. 
 II. EDUoATiON.--\-ain up a child in the way he 
 shouid go, and when he is old he will not depart from it. 
 Quintilian recommends to all parents the timely edu- 
 cation of their child en ; advising to train them up in 
 learninp;, r^ood manuors, and virtuous exercises; since 
 we comma ily retain those things in age which we enter- 
 tained in youth. 
 
 *Tis education forms the common mind ; 
 Just as the twig is bent, the tree 's inclined. 
 
 An industrious and virtuous education of children is 
 a better inheritance for them than a great estate. 
 
 III. Pbospebity and Abvebsitt.— If I must make 
 choice either of continual prosperity or adversity, I would 
 choose the latter j for in adversity no good man can want 
 comtort, whereas, in prosperity, most uiuu .vvaiiu uiov^w- 
 tion. Adversity overcome, is the greatest glory ; and. 
 
 
 4 
 
 i; 
 
 ,K.' 
 
 
 
 I 
 
86 
 
 INTHODTJCTION TO ANALYTICAL OBAMMAB. 
 
 I ' 
 
 willingly undergODe, the greatest virtue ; sufferings are 
 but the trials of gallant spirits. 
 
 IV. Angeh. — The continuance of anger is hatred ; 
 the continuance of hatred becomes malice ; that anger 
 IS not warrantable which has suffered the sun to go down 
 upon It. Let all men avoid rash speaking. One unquiet, 
 perverse disposition, distempers the peace and unity of 
 a whole family, or society— as one jarring instrument 
 will spoil a whole concert. 
 
 y. EiCHEs.— Eiches beget pride; pride, impatience j 
 impatience, revenge ; revenge, war ; war, poverty ; pov- 
 erty, humility; humility, patience; patience, peace; 
 and peace, riches. 
 
 The shortest way to be rich, is not bv enlarging our 
 estates, but by contracting our desires." A great for- 
 tune m the hands of a fool, is a great misfortune. The- 
 more riches a fool has, the greater fool he is. 
 
 PERSEYERANCE. 
 It is astonishing to see how much can be done by 
 perseverance. Jessie is not so smart as either of her 
 sisters, yet it strikes me, she will grow up the most 
 sensible woman of the three ; and what do you think ia 
 the reason 1 Why, because she nevar says she can do 
 a thing, but tries, over and over again, till she does it. 
 She is not quick, nor is her memory very good ; there- 
 fore it is a great trouble to her to learn a lesson by heart ; 
 but yet she is generally better prepared than the others'. 
 Though Louisa can learn a page of history in ten minutes 
 and Clara went twice through the grammar before Jessie 
 got to the twentieth page, yet these quick folks often 
 forget as fast as they learn, and, like the hare in the 
 fable, that ran a race with the tortoise, they are left be- 
 hind at laat.-^Use/ul Stories. 
 
 WASHINGTOIf AND HIS MOTHER. 
 Tounff Geore'e waa nhmif fn «■/> fr» o^o oo. « ^:4„t,:_ 
 man ; everything was arranged, the vessel lay opposite 
 bis lather's house, the little boat had come on shore to 
 
iAMMAB. 
 
 ; sufferings ar©^ 
 
 iger is hatred ; 
 ce ; that anger 
 sun to go down 
 . One unquiet, 
 le and unity of 
 ing instrument 
 
 le, impatience ; 
 , poverty ; pov- 
 ktience, peace ; 
 
 r enlarging our 
 A great for- 
 3fortune. The 
 ) is. 
 
 n be done by 
 } either of her 
 ■ up the most 
 lo you think is 
 iys she can do 
 ill she does it. 
 ' good ; there- 
 sson by heart ; 
 lan the others, 
 in ten minutes, 
 r before Jessie 
 ek folks often 
 le hare in the 
 ey are left be- 
 
 AL2I ft VW^ V WrH X^ -vm^ 
 
 tea a ii*iUwUXU~ 
 
 L lay opposite 
 ae on shore to 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 87 
 
 take him off, and his whole heart was bent on going. 
 After his trunk had been carried down to the boat, he 
 went to bid his mother farewell, and saw the tears burst- 
 ing from her eyes. However, he said nothing to her ; 
 but he saw that his mother would be distressed it he 
 went, and perhaps never be happy again, ii© Jj^^t 
 turned round to the servant, and said, '* Go and teU 
 them to fetch my trunk back. I will not go away to 
 break my mother's heart." His mother was struck 
 with his decision, and she said to him, '* George, God 
 has promised to bless the children that honor their 
 parents, and I believe he will bless you." 
 
 PART THIRD.— SYNTAX. 
 
 Lesson 39. — General Principles of Syntax, 
 
 Syntax is that part of Grammar whicli 
 treats of the proper arrangement and con-^ 
 neetion of words in a sentence. 
 
 A Sentence is such an assemblage of words aa maVea complete 
 sense; as, ''Man is mortal." 
 
 A Phease is two or more words rightly put together, but not 
 making complete sense; as, « In truth,"--" To say the least. 
 
 A Substantive Phrase is one which, in the construction of a 
 sentence, is equivalent to a noun or substantive, being the sul^iect 
 of a verb, or the object of a transitive active verb or preposition; 
 as, « To do good, is to be happy ;" To do good, forget not, <fec. 
 
 An Adjunct is a preposition with its regimen or subsequent terni 
 as related to its principal or antecedent term; as. The waters of 
 Jordan ; They came to Corinth. 
 
 Sentences are of four kinds : Declaratory, Interrogatory, Im- 
 perative, and Exclamatory. 
 
 All sentences are either simple or compound. 
 
 A sirnple sentence contains only a single affirmation ; as, "Life 
 is short." 
 
 A compound sentence consists of two or more simple genteacea 
 connected together ; as, *' Life which is short, should be well im- 
 proved." 
 
 
 r- 
 
 
iPi 
 
 mum 
 
 
 
 
 S8 INTEODTTCTION TO AK .LYTIOAL GEAMMAE. 
 
 Lesson 40.— I. Analysis oe Sentences. 
 
 A simple sentence or proposition consists 
 of two parts— the subject and the predicate. 
 
 The subject is that of which something is 
 affirmed ; as, Snow is white ; Time flies. 
 
 The predicate is that which is affirmed of 
 the suhject ; as, Snow is white ; Time jlies. 
 
 The subject is commonly a noun or pronoun— an infinitive mood, 
 or part of a eentence ; Ood is good ; he does good. 
 
 The predicate properly consists of two parts : the a^riftw^e affirmed 
 of the subject, and the copula, by which the affirmation is made. 
 Thus, in the sentence, " God is love "— Got^is the subject, and u love 
 is the predicate, in which, love is the attribute, and i«, the copula. 
 
 The attribute and copula are often expressed by one word ; as, 
 ** The fire burns" =« " The fire is burning.'' Hence, — 
 
 The predicate may be a noun or pronoun, an adjective, a prepo- 
 sition with its case, an adverb, an infinitive, or part of a sentence, 
 connected always with the subject by a copulative verb as a copula 
 (An. <fc Pr. Gr. 605), or it may be a verb, which includes in itself 
 both attribute and copula, as above, and is called an attributive verb. 
 
 QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is Syntax ? What is a sentence ?— a phrase ?— a substan- 
 tive phrase? — aa adjunct? How many kinds of sentences are 
 there f What are they ? What is a simple sentence ?— a compound 
 eentence ? What are the parts of a simple sentence ? What is the 
 subject ?—the predicute ? What is the subject commonly t Of what 
 does the predicate consist f What is the attribute /*— the copula ? 
 Are both ever expressed by one word I What may the predicate be ? 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following, which are sentences ? and which are phrases ? 
 and why ? 
 
 In the sentences, mention the subject— the predicate, and why. 
 
 Snow is white. lee is cold. Time flies. Life is short. 
 In truth. God is good. Home is sweet. To be sure. 
 
 'ATul/il vvlii pioVaii. xjirua iiy. 
 
 
GAMMAS. 
 
 THE SUBJECT. 
 
 89 
 
 INTENCES. 
 
 ion consists 
 le predicate. 
 omething is 
 me flies. 
 
 3 affirmed of 
 : Time^^'^5. 
 
 m iDfim'tive mood, 
 )d. 
 
 e attribute affirmed 
 irmatioQ is made, 
 subject, and u love 
 id is^ the cupula. 
 
 by one word ; as, 
 [ence, — 
 
 adjective, a prepo' 
 )art of a sentence, 
 e verb as a copula 
 
 includes in itself 
 an attributive verb. 
 
 hrase ? — a substan- 
 5 of sentences are 
 nee ? — a compound 
 ince ? What is the 
 mmonly t Of what 
 ute? — the copula? 
 y the predicate be ? 
 
 (rhich are phrases ? 
 
 edicate, and why. 
 i. Life is short, 
 et. To be sure. 
 
 I ^ ct r\-wtr\ rv^/\i\Y\ 
 
 1U.M a*s.c Lli-VVii* 
 
 Lesson 41.--The Subject. 
 I. The subject of a proposition is either 
 grammatical or logical. 
 
 The grammatical subject is the person or thing spoken of, unlim- 
 ited by other words ; as. Knowledge is power. 
 
 Thelogical subject is the personor thiug spoken of together wib 
 all the words or prasees by which it is limited or defined. Thus, m 
 the senrence "Every man at his best state is vanity," the gramma- 
 lical subjecUs " man ;" the logical, " Every man at his best state 
 
 When the grammatical subject has no limiting words connected 
 with it, then tlie grammatical and logical subject are the same ; as, 
 God is good. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 In the following sentences, which is the grammatical, and which 
 the logical subject ? 
 Point out the subject and the predicate in each. 
 The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom. 
 All men have not faith. The memory of the just is 
 blessed. Happy is the man that fi.. Jeth wisdom. The 
 blessing of the Lord maketh rich. Wise men lay up 
 knowledge. A man's pride shall lay him low. 
 
 II. The subject of a proposition is either 
 simple or compotmd. 
 
 A simple subject consists of one subject of thought either un- 
 limited, or modified as in the precedmg exercises. It may be a 
 noun or pronmn, an infinitive mood, sx participial noun, or a clause 
 of a sentence. 
 
 A compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects, to 
 which belongs but one predicate ; as, You and /are friends. 2 ime 
 and tidn wait for no man. Two and three are five. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following, point out the subjects and ^}}^ P/f'^^^f^'l^^f 
 whether simptle or compound-limited or unlimited. Distinguisn 
 the grammatical or logical. 
 
 Time and tide wait for no man. The rich and the 
 poor meet together. Two and three are five. W ealtn 
 makes many friends. James and John are cousins. 
 
 H 
 
 ds.1 
 
e^'^v" 
 
 rii 
 
 P 
 
 '^ 
 
 ', 
 
 1^^ 
 
 90 INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL GHAMMAE. 
 Lesson 42.— Modijicafions of the Subject. 
 
 A grammatical subject, being a noun, may 
 be modified, limited, or described in various 
 ways; as, , 
 
 1 By a noun in apposition •, as, «' Milton, the poet, was blind. ^^ 
 
 2 By a noun in the possessive case ; as, " Aaron's rod budded. 
 
 3 By an adjunct; as, " The works of Nature are beautiful" 
 
 4 By au adjective word (i.e.,*an article, adjective, adjective pro- 
 
 ioun, or participle) ; as. - A good name is better than riches. 
 5. By a relative pronoun and its clause ; as, « He who does no 
 
 good, does harm." j, 
 
 6 By an infinitive mood; as, A desire to /^arn is praiseworthy. 
 n. By a clause of a 8entei|e ; as, " The fact that he was a scholar 
 
 was manifest." ^ 
 
 8. Each grammatical subject may have several modifications. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following sentences, point out the grammatical subject-- 
 the logical— and state how the grammatical subject is modihed. 
 
 A wise man foreseeth evil. Wisdom's wayp are pleas- 
 antness. Treasures of wickedness profit nothing. He 
 that walketh uprightly, walketh surely. Isature does 
 nothing in vain. Socrates, the philosopher, died by poi- 
 son. A desire to excel will stimulate to exertion. 
 
 Lesson AZ,— Modification of the Modifying Words, 
 
 Modifying or limiting words may them- 
 selves be modified. 
 
 1 A noun modifying another, may itself be modified in all the 
 ways in which a noun, being a grammatical subject, is modi- 
 
 fied. 
 - > _ J- -i.: Mf.,:.^r^ o riAnn mnv itsfilf be modified:— 
 
 1. By an adjunct ; as, " Blessed are the pare in heart:' 
 
 2. By an adverb ; as, " A truhj good man hates evil." 
 
 3. By an infinitive; as, " Be Bwift to hear, slow to speak." 
 
TUB PBEDICATE* 
 
 01 
 
 MMAB. 
 Suhj'iCt. 
 
 noun, may 
 in various 
 
 et, was bliad." 
 I'a rod budded." 
 ro beautiful." 
 re, adjective pro- 
 iter than riches.'^ 
 He who does no 
 
 18 praiseworthy.'' 
 he was a scholar 
 
 modifications. 
 
 natical subject — 
 ct is modified. 
 
 wrayF ^re pleaa- 
 
 nottiing. He 
 
 Nature does 
 
 jr, died by poi- 
 
 exertion. 
 
 Ufying Words, 
 
 may them- 
 
 [uodified in all the 
 al subject, is modi- 
 he modified : — 
 are in hearth 
 1 hates evil." 
 r, slow to 
 
 3. Again, an adverb muy be modified :— 
 
 1. By au adjunct ; as, " Agreeably to Nature^ 
 
 2. By another adverb; as, " Yours very sincerely." 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 la the following sentences, by what words are the modifying 
 nouns modified ?-the adjectives ?-the adverbs \ 
 
 The ricli man's wealth is his strong city. The very 
 best remedv for certain evils is exercise. Truly great 
 men are far above wordly pride. Your very kind letter 
 has been received. 
 
 Lesson 44.— The Pebdicate. 
 I. The predicate, like the subject, is either 
 grammatical or logical. 
 
 The grammatical predicate consists of the attribute and copula, 
 not modified by other words. 
 
 The attribute, which together with the copula forms the predi- 
 cate mav be expressed by a noun or pronoun, an adjective, yar- 
 tt^lTI prepZion with its case, and sometimes an adverb; as 
 James is aXzar. James h diligent. J ame^ is learned. James 
 is in health. John is not so. 
 
 The attribute, and copula are often expressed by one word, as 
 the fire burns=^is burning. 
 
 The attribute is also expressed by an infinitive or a dependent 
 cJise "o obey is to enjoyr tL order is that we must go 
 
 The loaical predicate is the grammatical, together with all tne 
 woT's^anTphrLs that modifylt :-Thus. Nero was cruel to h.s 
 subjects — Grammatical predicate, "was cruel —Logical, was 
 cruel to his subjects." 
 
 When the grammatical predicate has no modifying term con- 
 nected with it^ the grammatical and the logical predicate are the 
 same; as, "Life is short." ''Time flies. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following sentences, name the subject and the predicate. 
 In each,Vell what^s the grammatical, and what is the logical pre- 
 dicate. . . 
 
 The wind blows. The fire burns. Man is mortal. 
 •Wisdom is the principal thing. He that tilleth his land 
 
 «4 
 
 J- J 
 
 H 1 
 
 1* 
 
 B 1 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 
 2.5 
 2.2 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 
 1.25 \U 
 
 11= 
 
 
 < 6" — 
 
 
 ► 
 
 rtiotograpMc 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. MS80 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 # 
 
 <b 
 
 
 - o 
 
 o\ 
 
92 INTBODTJCTIOT^f TO AKALTTIOAL OaAMMAE. 
 
 shall be satisfied with bread. The way of a fool is right 
 in his own eyes. A soft answer tumeth away wrath. 
 
 II. The predicate, like the subject, is 
 either simple or compound. 
 
 A simple predicate ascribes to its subject but cue attribute; as» 
 ** Truth (8 great:* 
 
 A compound predicate consists of two or more simple predicates, 
 affirmed of one subject; as, ** Truth is great and will prevail: 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 In each of the following sentences, name the subject and the pre- 
 dicate. State whether the predicate is timple or compound. Dis- 
 tinguish the grammatical and logical. 
 
 The fields are green. CsBsar came, saw, and conquer- 
 ed. John reads and writes well. The cities of the 
 enemy were plundered and burned to the ground. The 
 night was dark and rainy. A scorner seeketh wisdom 
 and findeth it not. Charity suffereth long, and is kind. 
 
 ifH 
 
 Lesson 4b»— Modifications of the Predicate, 
 
 A grammatical predicate may be modified 
 or limited in various ways. 
 
 When the attribute in the grammtitical 
 predicate is a noim, it is modified — 
 
 1, By a noun or pronoun limiting or describing the attribute : as, 
 
 " He is John the Baptist." "He is my friend." « He is 
 my father's friend." 
 
 2. By an adjective or partici|^ie limiting the attribute ; as, " Sol- 
 
 omon was a wise king." 
 
 When the grammatical predicate is an at- 
 tributive verb, it is modified — 
 
 1. By a noun or pronoun in the objective case, as the object of 
 
 the verb ; as. " We love him, "John reads Homer V 
 
 2. By an adverb; as, "John reads iwW." 
 
 3. By an adjpnct ; ns, " They live in London:' 
 
y 
 
 OOMPOTTND BBHTEHCES. 
 
 93 
 
 v'. 
 
 ' 4. ByaninfinitiTes as, " Boys love (o pJay." , 
 
 8 By a dependent clause; aa. "Plato taught tM the «o«! .. 
 
 "a tS driX'-f a depenaentpropcition may be modified 
 in trffleft and predicL '^^^-J^Z^m as simi- 
 
 AU other modifying words n«y themselves be mooine 
 lar words are Tf hen modifying the subjeet. 
 
 Several modifieations are sometimes comieeted ^v.th the same 
 
 P""""""*- EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following sentences name the -^ec^^^^^^^^ 
 
 »^^t^ ^rSi^nre? i»fl:i rt&oal. 
 
 His father -d ^.^^r Sy SSsC^r 
 Hannibal crossed ttie ^^f^'^^^^ ^gatroy the fleet. 
 
 evMy virtue. I wish that he would come soon. 
 
 Lesson 46 — CUepoMnd Sentences. 
 
 A compound sentence consists of two or 
 more simple sentences, or propositions, con- 
 Sed tolether; as. "If time is money, 
 wasting it must be prodigality. 
 
 The propositions which make up a com- 
 pound sentence are called members or clauses. 
 
 Independent and Dependent Clauses. 
 The clause, of a compound sentence are either i«detmd«>i. or 
 J^d^n'metime. cSlIed «o-or<Jma« and » <«■" 
 An independent clause is one that makes complete sense by itseU. 
 Aaepe«dent«l.seiso.thatm^^^^^^^ 
 
 "w"Teft""Ts ."nrdepentot'ctai; "when the sunset." is a ae- 
 pldent on" The dependent clause often stands first. 
 
 .1 II 
 
 
■■n:.-M!mM^aaii^».. J 
 
 £- 
 
 94 INTEODTJCTION TO ANAITTIOAI OBAMMAB. 
 
 EXERCISES. • 
 I„ the Moving -ntence, state. hi.h are ei^^^^^^^^ 
 
 *°',;7 •„„« wfl« Tirouaht to the door, and we set out 
 
 The c""^S« ^''^r^^ had set before we got home. 
 
 on our journey. /\«^"^ ""^^^^ ^^ ^ith a cordial wel- 
 
 come. ^^''"'^S'' ? ; " i-j when both doubt and futurity 
 subjunctwe mood is used when ^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 rnVSn t U S'hriU not depart fr Jm it. If thine 
 enemy hunger, feed him. 
 
 Ijesson 4n.— Connection of Clauses. 
 
 Clauses of the same kind, whether inde- 
 t,enS or dependent, are connected by such 
 SjStions as and, or, nor, but, yet &c.; as 
 
 .^S! harvest is past, the summer is ended, and we are not 
 *"n ttese, the eonneetive is sometimes omitted. 
 
 The members of a compound sentence con- 
 taining one or more dependent clauses are 
 S3y connected by relatives, conjunctions, 
 or adverbs ; thtis ■, . ,. 
 
 SMive -« That WBion can not b, cured, must be endured. 
 ^^Zio^.-" The miser lives poor, .n« ke nay d. ruk. 
 Adverb —"yfemW go yam the ears arnve. ,,,.,, 
 
 See Analytical and Practical Grammar, 645, 646. 
 
 ' EXERCISES. 
 In the following compound -nlence.. state whieh^c^ontaino^^^ 
 
 ite^rt"atraU"ats:on ^h^tS^^ '^>^^^ <»''P»'»- 
 Name the connecting words. 
 
 1 
 
lAK. 
 
 and which are 
 '8 or clauses — 
 which depend- 
 
 i we set out 
 e got home, 
 cordial wel- 
 L him. The 
 and futurity 
 le should go, 
 it. If thine 
 
 ABBIDGED PBOPOSITIONS. 
 
 95 
 
 T^fiar aod and keep his commandments. Hear in- 
 stru tJon^and ^^^ wise', and refuse it not. He that is 
 «nrPtv for a stranger, shall smart for it. ihe wickcq 
 Te when no'rnanV When I waa a chiW I 
 
 spaJasachild. Where thou goest I will go. If thou 
 be wise, thou shalt be wise for thyselt. 
 
 tive is omitted. ^i j«,w. 
 
 The iniuries we do, and those we suffer. »-* seldom 
 weighed in the same balance. See tho a do it not. Your 
 father thinks you ought to study more. 
 
 m 
 
 uses, 
 
 jtlier inde- 
 ed by such 
 et,&or, as, 
 
 and we are not 
 
 atence con- 
 lauses, are 
 mjunctions^ 
 
 , be endured." 
 may die rich.^ 
 
 ammar, 645, 646. 
 
 rhich contain only 
 »s. Point out the 
 tuses they depend. 
 
 Lesson AS.— Abridged Propositions. 
 
 A compound sentence may fn^eti^/^.^^ 
 converted into a simple one, by abridgmg 
 its dependent clause. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Abridge the following compound sentences Into •^J^^"^^''- 
 When our work is finished we will play. When I 
 
 had visited Europe, I returned to A«en=a. " ^s saj 
 that " the love of money is the root of ail evil , aauy 
 observation shows that it is so. 
 
 2. Extend the following simple sentences into compound ones . 
 
 OTident; His being successful is douDUui. auo «». 
 being ended, trade revived. 
 
I 
 
 ■ 
 
 I 
 
 . 
 
 41 
 
 96 
 
 INTEODXJCTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAB. 
 
 Xiesson 49. — Directions for Analysis, 
 State whether the sentenoe is simple, or compound. 
 If simple, name the logical subject, and the logical predicate. 
 ITame the grammatical subject. 
 Show by what words or phrases, if any, it is modified in the logical. 
 
 Show by what modifying words, if any, each modifying word is 
 modified. 
 
 Name the grammatical predicate. 
 
 Show by what words or phrases, if any, it is modified in the logical. 
 
 Show by what modifying words or phrases, if any, each modifying 
 word is modified. 
 
 If the sentence is compound, mention the members, or clauses. 
 
 State whether they are independent, or dependent. 
 
 Show how the members are connected. 
 
 Analyze each member as a simple sentence, by showing its subject, 
 predicate, (be, as above. 
 
 Models of Analysis, 
 
 1. ** God is good." 
 
 This is a simple sentence, because it contains a subject and a pre- 
 dicate. 
 
 Qod is the logical subject, because it is that of which the quality 
 is affirmed. 
 
 i« good is the logical predicate, because it affirms a quality of its 
 subject. /« is the verb or copula, and good is the attribute. 
 
 In this sentence, the grammatical subject and predicate are the 
 same as the logical, because they are not modified by other words. 
 Or, more briefly, thus :— 
 The logical subject is God. 
 
 The logical predicate is is good, in which is is the verb or copula 
 and good the attribute. 
 
 The grammatical subject and predicate are the same as the logical. 
 
 2. " The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.' * 
 This is a simple sentence. 
 
 The logical subject is The fear of the Lord, 
 
 The grammatical subject is fear. It is limited by th<> adjunct of 
 the Lord, and shown to be limited by the article the. 
 
 

 MODELS OF ANALYSIS. 
 
 97 
 
 .? 
 
 The grammatical predicate is is beginning, in yhich «« la thei verb 
 or copula, and ieginnmg the attribute. It is limited by the ad- 
 junct; o/«t«(fom, and ehown to be limited by the. 
 8. Two and two make four. 
 This is a simple sentence with a compound aulfject. 
 The logical subject is two and «*oo, compound. 
 The logical predicate is make four. 
 The grammatical subject is the same as the logical. 
 The grammatical predicate is make; it is modified by its object/otir. 
 
 4. Truth is great and will prevail. 
 This is a simple sentence with a compound predicate. 
 The logical subject is truth. 
 
 The logical predicate is is great and will prevail, compound. 
 The grammatical subject is the same as the logical. 
 The first grammatical predicate is is great; the second is will prt- 
 vailf they are connected by and. 
 
 6. Eemember now thy Creator in the days of thy youth. 
 This is a simple sentence, imperative. 
 The logical subject is thou understood. 
 The logical predicate is Remember now thy Creator in the day of 
 
 thy youth. 
 The grammatical subject is the same as the logical. 
 The grammatical predicate is Eemember. It is modified by mw 
 an adverb of ti£e, also by its oh^ect Creator l^^^^^^d by the pos- 
 sesaive adiective pronoun thy. It is further modified by the 
 IdjunctB in ths days of thy yoith. In the first of these adjuncte, 
 the term days is limited by the second adjunct, and shown to be 
 80 by the definite article the. 
 
 6. Eighteousness exalteth a nation ; but sin is a re- 
 proach to any people. 
 
 This is a compound sentence, consisting of two independent or co- 
 ordinate clauses. 
 The first clause, "Righteousness exalteth a nation" is a simple 
 
 independent sentence. Of this 
 The logical subject is Righteousness, 
 The logical predicate is exalteth a nation. 
 The grammatical subject is the same as the logical. 
 
 fm-- _,-.4.:^-,i ■^...i^rii/.of A ia ttxaluth^ It is modified by its object 
 
 ^"fiiSi^"tndthis^is shown to be used indefinitely by the article a 
 prefixed. , 
 
 
I 
 
 
 98 INTEODUCTION TO AHALYTIOAL GEAMMAE. 
 
 The •econd clause, sin i$ a reproach to any people, is also a eimple 
 indrendent eentence. and connected ^itt tCe P^e««f;"g ^^^^ 
 by X adversative conjunction hut, expressing contrariety or 
 opposition. Of this sentence 
 
 The logical subject is «tn. 
 
 The logical predicate is «« a reproach to any people. 
 
 The grammatical subject is the same as the logicad. 
 
 The grammatical predicate is « reproach of ^5^?VV'Sv brthe 
 anl renroach the attribute, shewn to be used ludefimtely by the 
 articleTprefixed. It is modified by the adjunct to any people 
 In this aC the word people is used in a general or unlimi^d 
 i^nte as tSmk^^ by thS in'definite adj. pronoun any prefixed 
 7. Whoso (="hethat" or *' the man that' ) loveth 
 instruction loveth knowledge. 
 
 This is a compound sentence, containing one independent, and one 
 dependent clause. ^« ., . ^i * '^^i 
 
 The independent clause is He loveth knowledge. Of this the logical 
 Bubject^la ^^ or the man, implied in the compound pronoun 
 Whoso. 
 The logical predicate is loveth knowledge. 
 The grammatical subject is the same as the logical. 
 The grammatical predicate is loveth. It is modified by its object 
 
 The"deSent clause is that l<yveth instruction. It is connected 
 withTe preceding clause by the relative that restrictive of he 
 its antecedent * 
 
 The logical subject is the relative that. 
 
 The logical predicate is loveth instruction. 
 
 The trrammatical subject is the same as the logical. 
 
 ^ ^e fr^matical predicate is loveth. It is modified by its object 
 instruction. ^ 
 
 8. When all thy mercies, O my Uoa i 
 my rising soul surveys, ^ 
 
 Transported with the view, I m lost 
 in wonder, love, and praise. 
 
 This i. a compound •^t'"'* ~"-«°? l^t^^^^^^^^ 
 
 " th« natural order ; thus, „ ., 
 
 O mv soul 1 at the time at which my rising soul surveys an iny 
 me^creri'tauBPorted with the view, am lost in wonder, (in) love, 
 and (in) praise. n 
 
OONSTEUOTION OP SENTENCES.^ 
 
 99 
 
 iB. 
 
 Igo a Bimple 
 sding clause 
 atrariety or 
 
 s the copula, 
 litely by the 
 I any people. 
 or unlimited 
 my prefixed, 
 
 tt") loveth 
 dent, and one 
 
 bis the logical 
 )und pronoun 
 
 , by its object 
 
 b is connected 
 Btrictive of he 
 
 i by its object 
 
 I! 
 
 }st 
 
 pendent clause 
 be independent 
 ud arranged in 
 
 Buiveys all thy 
 onder, (in) love, 
 
 praise." In this simple sentence, 
 The logical subject is, /. trannporUd with the vieu>. 
 The logical predicate is, am lost in wonder, love and praise. 
 
 The grammatical subject is /. denoting the speaker. It i« f««^^i^^^ 
 hv thrDarticiple transported, and this agam is modified by the 
 aJjunct'^S^r.^^^ In this adjunct, the term -"^^^.^^ ^^?f^^^^ 
 ?bi dependent clause, and shoT^n to be used defimtely by the 
 
 definite article the, 
 
 and expressed before the last. 
 The second clause is a dependent simple eentence, arranged thus m 
 
 ^tP order : ^.^^^^^^^^^^ l^^.T.'^W^. 
 
 I^f principal predicate am lost; and the second, -at whtch, 
 mXsTe Predicate of the dependent clause surveys. 
 
 The logical subject of this clause is, my rising soul. 
 The logical prepicate is, surveys all thy mercies. 
 
 i.« 1 -.,w..Af ia Mul It is described by the participial 
 ■^^^r^SffimUror quiufied by the ^po.e£we n,y- 
 my rising soul. 
 
 pronoun all, and the possessive thy. 
 
 See LeBsoD 71* 
 
 EXERCISES, 
 Thus analyse the following eentenoes :— 
 Manismortia. AU m^n are mortal. 1^h?"i« 
 the diligent maketh nob Jme ...^^. The lo -f 
 
 Siide'd. He tlr^i^ his rieheB, shall fall, 
 wvion nriilft «ometli. then cometb shame. 
 
 i' 
 
11 I 
 
 100 INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTIOAL OBAMMAB. 
 
 Lesson 50. — II. Constbuotion or Sentences. 
 Words are arranged in sentences, accord- 
 ingto certain rules, calledthe Rules of Syntax. 
 
 661. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 1. In every sentence, there must be a verb and its nominative (or 
 •ubjeot), expressed or understood. 
 
 2. Every article, adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle, muat 
 have a substantire, expressed or understood. 
 
 3. Every nominative or subject has its ovrn verb, expressed or 
 understood. 
 
 4. Every finite verb, (that is, every verb not in the infinitive or 
 participles) has its own nominative, expressed or understood. 
 
 6. Every possessive case is governed by a noun or subBtantiye 
 denoting tne object possessed. 
 
 6. Every objective case is governed by a transitive verb in the 
 active voice, or by a preposition ; or denotes circumstances of time, 
 value, weight or measure. 
 
 7. The infinitive is governed by a verb, a noun, or an adjective. 
 The exceptions to these general principles will appear in the 
 
 Rules of Syntax. 
 
 PARTS OF SYNTAX. 
 
 The rules of Syntax may all be referred 
 to three heads ; viz., Cgncord^ or agreement^ 
 Oovernmenty and Position. 
 
 Concord is the agreement one word has 
 with another in gender, number, case, and 
 person. 
 
 Government is the power which one word 
 has in determining the mood, tense, or case 
 of another word. The word governed by 
 another word is also called its regimen. 
 
 Position means the place which a word 
 occupies in relation to other words in a sen- 
 tence. 
 
 In the English language, which has but few inflections, the meaa- 
 ing of a sentence often depends ^nuch on the ^ost^ton of the words 
 of which it consists. 
 
STTBBTANTIVES IN APPOSITION. 
 
 101 
 
 Lesson bl-— Substantives in Apposition. 
 
 Rule I.— Substantives denoting the same 
 person or thing, agree in case ; as, Cicero, 
 the orator. 
 
 Words thusused are saidto be inappositwn. 
 
 Zlt TrnoTo :^^tt'iXr^Z ^emf r of tbe sentenc^ 
 
 by the words as, being, and the hke. 
 
 EXERCISES.* 
 1 Tn the followine Exercise, point out the words in apposition. 
 
 SeVi tht;i!JeSsaL casi." ^^ ^^^y/^i ^^.^^X ^^^^^^ 
 
 if not, it is wrong, and must be corrected. In the following, some 
 
 sentences are right, others wrong. 
 
 First in the hearts of his countrymen is Washington, 
 the hero, the statesman, and the patr^t. J^aFayette, the 
 friend of Washington, is no more. Tour brother has re- 
 turned; him who went abroad. I bought this paper from 
 a Seller, he who lives opposite ; will you please to 
 give it to that boy, he that stands by the door ? Is your 
 lister well, her that was lately sick ? Hand that book to 
 jX. he ;ho reads so well. The premmm for the best 
 writer is given to Thomas, he who took so much pains 
 to excel. 
 
 2. In this manner, write correct sentences containtog nouns, or 
 a noun and its pronoun, in apposition. ^ 
 
 • KB.-Throughout the Exercises in Syntax-first, correct the 
 errors- secondly, analyze orally the sentences corrected ; thirdly. 
 JSSe inr^o^^^^^^^ »"? lastly, parse synt^Ucally the 
 
 Snr^ nrVorda to which the Tule refers. See Lesson 75. 
 
 I 
 
 I' 
 
^ 
 
 TTnn^Tmr TO ANALYTICAL GEAMMAE. 
 102 1NTE0DTJCTI05 TO Ax^i*. 
 
 « nis man.' — ' ^/^ese me 
 
 ETPLANJ^TION.-Thi. rule "PP'f t»j "JiS I These 
 «(/«r, ««(A«' i ■^-d «^« ° wmore than one, are (V... (Ao". """"y. 
 
 ,„, „<,, te. ; thu., ^7-7f 1' roUowing the numeral i. used 
 0B9. 4. Exception. When a no ^ ^^^ ^^ pi„»i term- 
 
 - an adiecuve -- (^X Mo^ai ; a three ^oo. wall •, a four 
 inallon ; thus, we say, A lour .n v 
 
 ftor.. team ; a ten ««" »« ^' *°- _a ^^ adverbs ; thus, mi>erM4 
 OBB. 6. A-JJ^'^^r^f"!^.;; poor, sings *,a»«^ (686) 
 Voor,^'^1'S<'«'-^'^'^^r!ll^^^^i,>.i.i, thU refers to 
 OM. 6. When two or "o™ °°J"^ " . „ „ jtj,,^ and «« are 
 tt,e last mentioned, »f /''"^ ^^'^t mind% deba-s it- 
 opposite qualities ; 'ft»' *»"°*' l'" '„e compared, the eom- 
 Z^.1. Co»PXB.so.. ^^«°/-» *^then more than two, the 
 parative degree -— ^/^ his father." "John is the 
 Buperlativo ; as, ne w *«• 
 
 «ai2e«< amongst us." -UDerlatives are improper; tiius, 
 
 0BS.8. 1)oublecomparaUv^eB«.d^u^^^^^^ ^^^^ .^ ^^^ ^^,, 
 
 « James is more iaiiet laau u -^""^ — 
 
« 
 
 IHB A.BTIOLE. 
 
 108 
 
 B. 
 
 ve. 
 
 trticiple 
 belongs ; 
 
 fy nouns 
 
 ig MORE 
 
 tral; as, 
 to feet." 
 
 active words, 
 plea. These 
 r only in the 
 
 10, eachy 9veryt 
 xd, third, Ac 
 i«, those, many, 
 
 )e joined with 
 ense ; as, somet 
 
 aumeral is used 
 the plural term- 
 ^oo< wall; a four 
 
 ; thus, miserable 
 i elegantly (686.) 
 id, this refers to 
 rtue and vice are 
 ebasee it." 
 mpared, the cora- 
 e than two, the 
 » " John is the 
 
 :e improper; thus, 
 <«He is the mo»t 
 
 wisest of the throc."-omit most. For varieties and exceptions, see 
 An. 4 Pr. Gr. 677-706. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 rofet rent and mLrttb.t.„tive, s^^ 
 
 adjectives require. » /. ij 
 
 A well Bix fathom deep. A pole t«^ J^^^'lf :,At',^ 
 
 twenty rod wide. I have -^^^^^^t^e t^kd of tWng 
 noBesort of people ar^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ?Kage3. EalJvSve their owu place, and they know 
 ir The second and third page were torn. 
 
 %^X^^ Sre- 'Th-:^^-. 'nan had a pole .ix/«. long. 
 
 Lesson 53.- We Article. 
 Rtttp III —1. The article A or AN is put 
 before common nouns in the si^g^fj^^^; 
 ber when used iNDErraiXELY ; as, ' -^man 
 _«Xiple;" that is, «« a«y man"-« «».y 
 
 ^^^The article the is put before common 
 nouns, either sing^ar or plural when used 
 DEFINITELY ; as, "The sun rises -"The city 
 of New York. . „ , , 
 
 EXPLANATION.-Itisimpossible^^ 
 
 *." "'" "^';^\h<.:nsereSr The following usages may be 
 observe wbat the sense «qn"J • „ ijo7-728). 
 noticed. (For others, see An. fcPr.Wr.'iUi i^^, 
 
 Obs 1. The artiele is omitted before a noun that is unUmtt'd. or 
 tb^t" Is for a .HoU .,.««; as, Man is mortal; and be ^e tt.e 
 u^esof minerals, metaKarts,^.^Some_nounsdeo»^^^^^^^^ 
 
 cies, have the article always pren^cu , «=, — ^-.^ - - 
 
104 INTEODITCTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAB. 
 
 fulaDimal than the cat. The lion is a noble animal. Others never 
 have It ; thus, Lead is softer than iron. Wood is lighter than stone. 
 Obs. 2. The last of two nouns after a comparative, should have 
 no article when thej both refer to one person or thing ; as, He is a 
 better reader than writer. 
 
 Obs. 8. When two or more adjectives, or epithets, belong to the 
 
 'T. 'fj^f' *^' ^'^^"^^ '^"^^^ ^« P^^««d before the first, and 
 omitted before the rest ; but when they belong to different subjects, 
 tiie article is prefixed to each; thus, «A red and white rose." indi- 
 cates on. rose, partly red and partly white. «A red and a white 
 rose means (wo roses, one red and one white. "Johnson, the 
 bookseller and stationer," denotes one person. " Johnson, the book- 
 seller, and the stationer." denotes two. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 cle^* Show !Lw ?f ''°*^°««« «'« ^rong only m the use of the arti- 
 cie. bhow why they are wrong, and correct them. 
 
 A great talents without a virtue are danfferous. A 
 man is mortal. A time flies. The money is scarce 
 John IS a better farmer than a scholar. The black and 
 the white spaniel runs fastest. The black and white 
 spaniel run together. The time and the tide wait for no 
 
 W^i ^,^®;.f da white rose grows on this bush. The 
 black and white man came together. Smith, the tanner 
 and currier, entered into partnership. Smith, the tan- 
 ner and the currier, is a man of a great industry. 
 n nV !I"*® l^^""* '®°J.«°ce8, each of which shall contain the article 
 Xle. ' '' '^''"■"^^'''' ^bi^h sl^all contain nouns without an 
 
 i 
 
 Ijesson 54.— Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Rule IV.— Pronouns agree with the words 
 Jor whwh they stand, in gender, number, and 
 person; as, AU that a man hath. wiU he m^e 
 fov his life. - o--^ 
 
 EXPLANATION.-ThiB Rule applies only to the personal and 
 
%■ 
 
 2. 
 
 iers never 
 ban stone. 
 
 >uld have 
 s, He is a 
 
 Dg to the 
 Srst, and 
 subjects, 
 se," indi- 
 I a white 
 Qson, the 
 Ihe book- 
 
 the arti- 
 
 18. A 
 scarce, 
 ckand 
 white 
 for no 
 . The 
 tanner 
 e tan- 
 
 article 
 out an 
 
 PEESOlJAIi PBOlTOUNa. 
 
 105 
 
 ords 
 and 
 
 
 dand 
 
 .possessive pronouns. These stand ^»«^''^l-ratttl-rof 
 
 PEKSONAL PRONOUN-SPECIAL RULES. 
 ,> .1 When a t>ro«ounnf€rt to t«o or more wards taken to- 
 
 '*"*^'l« 2 -When a pronoun «/.r. to tm or mor. »or<fe «. (*« .<«• 
 %:iar; as, "A rioc* or a »a<oft moves merely a, .< « moved^ ^ 
 
 KuiK iS. -D"' ./ ■/ „ jr .(^^ jj nor they trouble «ft«n- 
 
 «o«« mwit U plural alio ; as. " «»"=' 
 
 " Ob;" 1 A pronoun referring to a eoUeetive nonn in tl'^""^"!": 
 Obs. 1. A pru" , 1^ . ^ neuter singular; 
 
 expressing many as one whole, should ~ ^ „„ 
 
 but when the pronoun expresses many as '»'l'^'?"'"''; l_,,^^ 
 should be plural ; as. "The army proceeded on ,t. march. 
 «o«r« were divided in their opinions. 
 
 03,. 2. The word containing «ie answer to a .— • -^^';f. 
 in the same case as the word that asks it . as ^ w 
 Ans. «I (said it)." "Whose books "« ^e'ej ^m- •" 
 Z other Notes and Observations, see An. & Pr. Gr. 731 741. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1. In the foUowing Exercise ,Point "^ ^^^^^^ SfaiK 
 
 person, with its noun. A nswer not a fool ac- 
 
 Give to every man *ejT due^ Answe-^ n ^^^ 
 
 cording to ber folly. Tak« *'^^7^^„° ,,i^ent ani^put 
 kle it toward l^^^^/^^esb^d it between them. 
 
 tr -PJw? Me wSodfdtLt? Him. Wbom 
 Wbo 18 there :■ me. «i»^ „„ ^, that? Her or 
 
 S^r ^rtue fo'cts her w^rt^ obscurity, and 
 Tner or later it is sure to be rewarded. 
 
 e.1 
 
 1 
 
 V; 
 
106 INTEODTJCTION TO AITJLLTTIOAL GBAMMAB. 
 Lesson 55. — Relative and Antecedent. 
 
 Rule V. — The relative agrees with its an- 
 tecedent in number and person ; as, " Thou 
 who speakest." — " The book which was lost." 
 
 EXPLANATION.— -The relative stands instead of the noun or 
 pronoun called its antecedent, u;id also connects the idea expressed 
 in its clause with the antecedent, either for the purpose of further 
 describing it, or of limiting and restricting it. [See Lesson 18, 
 Obs. 1]. Consequently, the relative is always regarded as of 
 the same person and number as its antecedent ; and, if the nomina- 
 tive to a verb, the verb will be of the same number and person 
 also. For remarks respecting the antecedent, and the use of who 
 and which, see Lesson 13. 
 
 Rule 1. — Who is applied to persona, cr things personified ; as, 
 **The man who** — ** The/oa; who had never seen a lion." 
 
 Rule 2. — Which is applied to things, and inferior animals ; as, 
 " The house which;** "The dog which." See Lesson 13, 4. 
 
 Rule 3. — That, as a relative, is used instead of who or which — 
 
 1. After the superlative degree, the words same, all, and some- 
 
 times no, some, and any; and generally in restrictive clauses ; 
 as, " It is the best that can be got." 
 
 2. When the antecedent includes both persons and things ; (is, 
 
 •' The man and the horse that we saw yesterday." 
 8. After the interrogative who, and sometimes after the personal 
 
 pronouns ; as, " Who that knows him will believe it." " I 
 
 that speak in righteousness." 
 4. Generally, when the propriety of who or which, is doubtful 
 
 as, " The child that was placed in the midst," 
 
 For other remarks, see An. & Pr. Or. '748-'759. 
 
 I I 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Point out the relative, and the noun or pronoun to which it 
 refers. Tell the use of the relative and its clause in each sentence. 
 Alter the relative, if necessary, as required by its antecedent, ac- 
 cording to Sub-Rule 1. If the relative is in the nominative, put 
 its verb in the same number and person as the relative or the ante- 
 cedent. Give a reason for each change. 
 
 The friend which I love. The vice whom I hate. 
 
 nrn 
 
 j.a<5ro 
 
 in 
 
 J.1- _ 
 
 uOg 
 
 vvuu 
 
 i?--n J 
 
 iUilUVVCU 
 
 U5. 
 
 rvi, 
 
 JLiiCjf 
 
 wuiuu seen. 
 
 wisdom, find it. All which beauty, all which wealth e*er 
 gave. " I who speak unto you, am he." It is the best 
 
T-- 
 
 NOMIlfATITB ABSOLTITE. 
 
 107 
 
 Situation wUch can be got. The man and the horse 
 
 of the following nouns or V'^^'^fJ"'^^'^i^t,chair;I,thou,he, 
 clause; vi^. M«n, *r«>t.S£««)^m«k" baskets." Parse 
 rern^ni^^. »d Xe nuX-^ pe-n of the relative, aad 
 
 •why. 
 
 Lesson m.—Subject Nominative. 
 
 UTILE YL-The subject ofafinUe ve^^ 
 put in the nominative; as, ",{«f • - ^J^, 
 ^Jlt"-"Se in."-" They are/'-'Tme &es. 
 
 = A finite verb is a verb limited by person and 
 nuSTe^rrr'^^^b ta ttlnd,eative. potential, subjuneUve, or 
 
 'Trilerf a finite verb may W -»• X'Ta -tf- 
 
 ^^ xn«t S "" " '^""""" 
 
 nominative. See An. & P. Of- Wl-"'- 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 to each sentence, point out the verb and its subject. If the sub- 
 jeot is not in the rigtt "^i "^^f • Suppose you and 
 
 =^ thZ C tfeUer^Ti; pXble fhat her 
 
 *^% ^ Jll ™tmn Robert is taller than me. but I am 
 ZiZlt to I am older than him ; but he . taller 
 
 than me. 
 
 Lesson bl. -Nominative Absolute. 
 
 ■RTTT17 VII —A s^ibstantive whose case de- 
 ^^lonnootherv^ord, i.put in tU wmv 
 native absolute.^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 . „ . .„*.<a»«». mth a participle, »fto.. c«. depend, <m 
 
 gone, only two remain. 
 
 ' '■S 
 
 1 
 
108 INTBODirOTlOK TO ANALYTICAL QBAMMAB. 
 
 EuLB 2.—^ person or thing addreasedf without a verb or govern- 
 ing word, is put in the nominative; as, " I remain, dear air, yours 
 traly." " "Plato, thou reasonest well." 
 
 BuLE 3. — A substantive unconnected in mere exclamation, is put 
 in the nominative; as, ''0 the times I — the manners T 
 
 Rule 4. — A substantive used by pleonasm, before an affirmation, 
 is put in the nominative; as, **Yo\a fathers, where are they?" 
 
 Under these Rules, a mistake can be made only in the case of 
 
 pronouns. 
 
 EXEROISES. 
 
 Point out the word in the case absolute or independent : if wrong,, 
 put it in the right case, and state why it should be in the nominative. 
 
 Me being absent, the business was neglected. Thee 
 being present, he would not tell me what he knew. Oh ! 
 happy us, surrounded with so many blessings. Thee 
 too f Brutus, my son ! cried Caesar overcome. 
 
 Ill \ 
 
 Ijesson 58. — Verh and its Nominative^ 
 
 Rule VIII. — A verh agrees with iUnom* 
 inative in number cmd person; as, "I read^^ 
 " Thou readest,'' " He reads,'' &c. 
 
 Explanation. — This Rule means, that a verb must alwaya be in 
 the same number and person with its subject or nominatiye. This 
 Rule and the Special Rules under it apply, also, whea the subject 
 is an infinitive mood, or clause of a sentence. See under Rule YI. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. In the following Exercises, tell which words are verbs — which 
 the nominatives — whether the verb and its nominative agree—- and 
 if not, make them agree by putting the verb in the person and 
 number of its nominative. 
 
 Tou was there. They was absent. Your brothers 
 has been abroad. Has your sisters come home ? Was 
 you present ? The letters has come. Fair words costs 
 nothing. There is no roses without thorns. 
 
 2. Take the verb to write^ and make it agree with /—with thou 
 — with he — with <A«y-- in all the tenses of the indicative mood.. 
 Take any other verb, and do the same. 
 
PBEDICA.TE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 109 
 
 Lesson bd.—l^erb and its Subject, 
 SPECIAL RULES UNDER RULE VIIL 
 Rule 1.-^ singular noun used in a plural sense, has a verb m 
 the nlural ; as, " Ten sail are in sigbt." 
 
 Rule %—Two or more substantives singular, taken together, have 
 a verb in 'the plural ; as, ^^ James and John are here." ^ 
 
 E -But when substantives connected by and, denote one 
 pers;. or thing, the verb is singular; as, "Why is dust and ashes 
 
 ^'Tot I 8 -^Two or more substantives singular, taken separately/, or 
 one to the exclusion of the rest, have a verb in the singular; as, 
 
 " James or Jchn attends^ 
 
 Rule 4 -TTAm substantives taken together, are of different per- 
 sons, the verb agrees with the one next to it; as, "James or I am m 
 the wrong ?" Better, •' James is in the wrong, or I am. 
 
 olso also when the substantives are of different numbers, m 
 which case the plural number is usually placed last. 
 
 Rule 5.-1 . A collective noun expressing many, considered^s one 
 WHOLE, has a verb in the singular; as, "The company/ «a« large. 
 
 2. But when a collective noun expresses many, considered «« indi- 
 viduals, the verb must be plural; as. "My people do not consider. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 In the following Exercises, put the verb in the number required 
 by the Rule, and give the Rule for the correction. 
 
 (1) Forty head of cattle v^as grazing m the meadow. 
 Twelve brace of pigeons ^ Bold for one dollar (2) 
 Life and death is in the p r of the tongue.^ Out ot 
 the same mouth proceedetn olessmg and cursing. (3) 
 Either the boy or the girl were present. (4) I or thou 
 am to blame. (5) The people was very numerous. 
 
 Lesson 60,— -The predicate Substantive, 
 
 Rule IX.,— The predicate substantive after 
 a verb, is put in the same case as the subject 
 
 It is i/'— ** lie 
 
 before it ; as, 
 
 ed Johnr—''! took it to be him 
 
 
 »> 
 
 
 '■i 
 
110 nrTBODiroTioN to akalttical gbammab. 
 
 EXPLANATION.^ Verbs having the same ease after as before 
 them, are chiefly those which signify io he, or to become; passive 
 verbs of naming, making, choosing, and the like; as, "John became 
 a scholar; "i?avtrf was made king^ The nominative before the 
 finite verb is the subject, the one after it is the predicate, and the 
 ▼erb 18 the copula. Hence they all form a simple sentence ; and 
 though the nouns denote the same person or thing, and are in the 
 same ease, they are not in apposition as in Rulb I; but the noun 
 after a verb is predicated of the substantive before it, or which is 
 Its subject. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following Exercises, in each sentence, point out the verb 
 to which the Rule applies, and the noun or pronoun before and 
 after it Tell the case of the one before, and why. Put the one 
 after the verb in the same case as the one before it, give the Rule 
 for the change, and show how it applies. Tell the subject and pre- 
 dicate in each sentence. 
 
 It is me. It could not have been them. I am certain 
 it was not me. That is the man who I thought it to be. 
 Is that thee ? "Whom did they say it was ? I under- 
 stood it to have been he. Was it me that said so ? It 
 could not have been me ; but it might have been him, or 
 her, or both. 
 
 2. Write similar correct genfenees, in each of which shall be one 
 of the following verbs, with the same case after it as before it, viz , 
 is, are, became, was made, shall be chosen to be, to be called, to be 
 appointed. Apply the Rule as above. 
 
 <|! 
 
 Lesson 61.-— Objective after a Transitive Verb, 
 
 E/ULE X. — A transitive verb in the active 
 voice, governs the objective case; as, "We 
 love him'' — ''Whom did they send ?" 
 
 EXPLANATION.- The transitive verb in the active voice, al- 
 ways tells what its subject or nominative does to some other person 
 or thing, called its object. The rule means, that this object must 
 always be put in the objective case. This lule is liable to be vio- 
 lated only when the object is a pronoun, because in all other words, 
 the nominative and the objective case are alike. 
 
 Nouns and personal pronouns in the objective case, are usually 
 placed after the verb— relative and interrogative pronoun?, usuallr 
 before it. r i ^ 
 
 • "ft '"!»& 
 
OBJBCTIVB AITEE k TBANBITITB TBBB. Ill 
 
 rm,* :«flnU? ve mood a participle used as a noun, or a part of a sen. 
 ♦ ?'mav brthroCct Sf a tran^^ active verb; as. " Boy«love 
 ^"J^l^Pl^Be^^^^^ reading aloud."-" I know what he mil do, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1 Tn the foUowinff Exercises, point out the transitive verb-ite 
 suSjec?-5tBoi!j:.™%tthatob^^^^ in the proper oase-tell what 
 
 that case is, and why. _ 
 
 He 1ov;b her and I. Did they hurt ye? T« j'^T 
 
 liBandthev He and they we know. Thefnendwho 
 
 Uove. Tike care who you admit. I will not gxve ye 
 
 UD He who you ignorantly worship, declare I unto you. 
 
 2 Write a number of sentences, each of which ehall eo"'"" »" 
 
 give the Rule. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 RULK 1,-^n intransitive verb does not govern an objective case; 
 aP « Repenting him of his design "-omit him. 
 
 nvLA-IntranHtive verbs in a transitive sense {Lesson 16,Ob8. 
 3^ novern the objective case ; as, " He runs a rate^ 
 
 Rule Z. -Intransitive verbs do not admit apassrve voice, except 
 ^hen used transitively (Lesson 18. 6) ; as, "My race ^^J^"'' ^ 
 
 RULB 4..- A transitive verb does not admit a preposition after it , 
 as "I will not allow 0/ it"— omit o/. 
 
 RULK 5.-F.r6s signifying to name, appoint, constit^b, and th. 
 me, generally govern two objectives, viz. : the direct, denoUngtl^ 
 person or thing acted upon; and the ^^m..cr denoting the reM 
 of the act exprecsed; as, "They named him John. 
 
 EXERCISES UNDER THE SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 Show how the rule is violated in each of the following sentences, 
 
 ^^rrKoW^^^^^^^^^ himself with bis lessons He lies 
 bii down on the grass. (2) They ejpatf ^^^^^^^ 
 laSelv. Planters grow cotton. Sit thee down. (3) 
 lamLolvedtogo^ Is your father returned ? He is 
 almost perished lith cold. (4) They do not want for 
 **""-: ^ ^T. i._ -« «-« fn wVinm ve obev. 
 
 fX afcuBation cannot diminish from hi3 real ment. 
 (5) He was chosen for a Senator. 
 
^ 
 
 ' 
 
 112 INTBODUCTION TO ANALTTIOAL GEAMMAB. 
 
 Lesson 62. — Objective after a Preposition, 
 
 Rule XI. — A preposition governs the ob- 
 jective case ; as, " To whom much is given, 
 of him much shall be required." 
 
 EXPLANATION. — This Rule means, that the noun or pronoun 
 after a preposition, must be put in the objective case. This rule 
 can be violated only in the use of pronouns. 
 
 Obs. 1. Whom and which are sometimes governed by a preposi- 
 tion at some distance after them. But this should generally be 
 avoided ; thus, " This is he whom I gave it to" — better — " to whom 
 I gave it." 
 
 Obs. 2. The preposition is sometimes omitted. It is then said 
 to be understood ; thus, " Give (to) me that book." Here, "we" 
 is governed by " to" understood. 
 
 SPECIAL RULE. 
 
 Rule.— iV^owns denoting time, value, weight, or measure, ate 
 4iommonly put in the objective case without a governing word; as, 
 " He was absent six months last year" — " It cost a shilling." — 
 "It is not worth a cent" — "It weighs a pound" — "The wall is six 
 feet high, and two feet thick." 
 
 This may be called the objective of time, value^ <fec. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Point out the prepositions and the word governed by each, 
 Put that word in the proper case, if not in it already. Give the Rule. 
 
 This belongs to my father and I. Who did you get it 
 from ? Who shall we send it to? Divide it between ye, 
 or give it to him and I. This is a small matter between 
 you and I. Who did you give it to ? Who do you work 
 for? 
 
 2. In this way, write a number of short sentences, each of which 
 ehall contain a preposition (see the list, p. 77), followed by a per- 
 sonal or relative pronoun in the proper case. Parse the sentences, 
 and give the Rule for the case after the preposition. 
 
 Obs. 8. — When the prepositions <o, at, in^ stand before names of 
 
 places, the following usage should be carefully observed. 
 
 1. To — is used after words denoting motion toward; as, "Ke 
 
 went to Spain ;" but, in this case, it is omitted before home, 
 
 as, " He went home." 
 
i, 
 
 on, 
 
 the ob- 
 given, 
 
 r pronoun 
 This rule 
 
 % preposi- 
 lerally be 
 •" to whom 
 
 then said 
 are, " me " 
 
 LSUB,E, are 
 word; as, 
 illing." — 
 vail is six 
 
 i by each, 
 the Rule. 
 
 )U get it 
 ^een ye, 
 between 
 ou work 
 
 of which 
 by a per- 
 jentences, 
 
 names of 
 
 as, " iie 
 ore hom»t 
 
 PEEPOfllTIONS APTEE CERTAIN WORDS. H^ 
 
 2 ^<-ia used before names of homes, villages, towns, and foreign 
 ' cities ; as, "He resides at the Mansion house-at Geneva- 
 
 . at Lisbon." , ^ ...^ , ^^ 
 
 3 /n-isused before names of eountriea and large cities, as, 
 
 « He lives in England-in London." But before th.se. at 
 is used after the verbs toucK arrive, land; and sometimes 
 
 after the verb to he. , i r »a ^ 
 
 4. In speaking of one's residence in a city a^ .s used before U.e 
 
 No. and m (generally understood), before the street. 
 This O^e" a J contains four npecial rules, numbered as above. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 0BS.3.-1. In the following sentences, change the preposition 
 used, for that which usage requires, and give the special Rule^ 
 
 I have been to home all day. Have you been to Bos- 
 ton ? They live in Union Village , formerly they lived 
 atWewTorl" He has been at England, and has just 
 turTed to home. We touched in France on our way 
 tn borne He lives to Washiugtou, at B. Street, out 
 resWed formerly in No. 50, Broadway, New York. 
 
 "rmito short sltences ^'^:^^^ :;T::^;^ 
 
 appropriate prepositioii. 
 
 Lesson eS.— Prepositions after certain Words. 
 
 EULE Xll— Certain loords and phrases 
 should he followed hy appropriate preposi- 
 tions: Thus— 
 
 Accuse of. 
 
 Acquit of. 
 
 Adapted to. 
 
 Ask or inquire of a person, for 
 
 what we wish to see,— a/<er 
 
 -what we wish to hear of. 
 Believe «n, sometimes on. 
 Betray to a person,— i«<o a tmng 
 €all on a person,— at a place. 
 
 rli 
 
 Chauge/or,— <o,— m<o. 
 
 Compare with, in respect of quali- 
 ty;— <o for the sake of illustra- 
 tion. 
 
 Confide in. 
 
 Conformable, consonant <o, waW. 
 
 C« »..«.>nf nmith mpii.—tw things. 
 
 Copy /ro»» life, nature,— a/<«r a 
 parent. 
 
 
 »ji i 
 
!■ 
 
 114 IKTBODUOTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAB. 
 
 Dependent upon. Made of, 
 
 Dieo/'dlBeaae, — &,v ^n instrument Marry to. 
 
 or violence,— /or another. Need of. 
 
 Differ /rom. Observation of 
 
 Difficulty in. Prejudice against. 
 
 Diminish /rom, — diminution of. Prevail (to persuade) vntht on, 
 Disappointed tn what we have, — upon, — (to overcome), over, 
 
 of what we expect. against. 
 
 Discourage from. Profit by. 
 
 Discouragement to. Protect (others) from, — (our- 
 EngaB:ed t»a work,— /or a time, selves) against. 
 
 Equal to, with. Provide with or for. 
 
 Exception /rom, — sometimes ^o. Reduce (to subdue) under^ — in 
 Expert a< (before a noun), — in other cases, to; as, <o powder. 
 
 (before an active participle). Rej^ard /or, — in regard to. 
 
 Familiar to, with. A thing is Sick of. 
 
 familiar to us; we are fami- Swerve /roni. 
 
 liar with it. Taste (meaning capacity or incli- 
 'Freefrom. nation) for, — (meaning actual 
 
 <}lado/'8omething gained by our- enjoyment) of. 
 
 selves, — at something that be Tax with (e.g., a crime),— /or the 
 
 falls another. state. 
 
 Independent of. Value upon, or on. 
 
 Indulge with what is not hab t- Worthy o/*, — sometimes the o^ is 
 
 ual, — in what is habitual. understood. 
 
 Insist upon. 
 
 EXPLANATION. — As words connected by prepositions^ are 
 diflFerently related, care must be taken to employ the preposition 
 which best expresses the relation intended. The sense and the 
 practice of correct writers, will here be our best guide. The above 
 are only a few examples out of many. 
 
 Ob3. — The same preposition that follows the verb or adjective, 
 usually follows the noun derived from it, and vice versa / as, Cou- 
 fide in, — confidence tn, — confident in, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Change the preposition where necessary in each of the follow* 
 •ing sentences, for that required by the rule. 
 
 He was accused with robbery, and acquitted from tbo 
 charge. I have been calling upon an old friend. Call 
 in the post-office. I differ with you in that matter. 
 John died by consumption, Henry died of the sword, and 
 Bobert is sick with the jaundice. Try to profit from ex- 
 perience. You have a taste of poetry. Conversant in 
 
 
I 11 
 
 THB POSSBBSIVB 0A.8B. 
 
 115 
 
 men and ttings. Compare this piece to that, and see 
 wHch is the heat. I could never bear the taste for to- 
 bacco This is an exception against the general rule. 
 
 9 Write short BentenoM, each of wW"'', '''»", 1°"'"" ??'°' 
 JUotZ word, ia the preceding table, followed by the appro- 
 
 priate preposition. 
 
 ! 
 
 
 sitions are 
 
 Lesson 64.— The Possessive Case. 
 
 P ULE y.III —A Substantive that limits 
 the smifioation of another, must be put in the 
 possessive; as, ^^rirtue^s vc^w^vi^-^^ Johns 
 books.''—** The sun's rays. 
 
 EXl>LANATlON.~'nie noun or pronoun ^;'^ the Poss-^^^^^^^^^^ 
 always limits the noun that g«^«^°^^ ,^» J^/ o^^^^^^^ 
 the latter word does not mean ^^^.^^^^ *° ffX ThisTule applies 
 
 ea.e implying common po^eesion, the .ign of the po«e8s.ve ( .) » 
 l«ed" tt.e kst, and understood to the rest- a,. « Jane and 
 Ws books," i.e.. books the common property of Jane and Lu^. 
 Bu if eomm;. possession ia not implied, or if »«"»• -^ "";'; 
 vene, the sign It the possessive should be •'-««f ^ jj; J. 
 "Jaile'sandWa books," i.e., books, some of which are Jan.. 
 
 "onsl -ml'a name is complex, consisting of more term, than 
 OB9.2.-wnenan »- ^ to the last only; as, 
 
 one, the sign of the possessive s London's 
 
 "Julius Cfflsar-B Oommentaries, ' -" The Bistiop 
 
 *" Ors -The noun limited by the possessive ia frequently unde.^ 
 .tood ■ as " He stays at hi. father's " (house). 
 ^''oL' r_Th. nrJposiUon of. with the objective, is frequently 
 equivalent to the" po«essive. but not always. In the use o, it. uuw 
 harshueu and ambiguity should be avoided. 
 
 
 I 
 
116 I5TB0DUCTI0K TO ANALYTICAL OUAMMAB. 
 
 - i: 
 
 'For Beveral of the minutiiB belonging to this Rule, see 
 
 Ad. & Pr. Gr. 839-850. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. In the folloTnog Exercises, point out the nonn or pronoun 
 "which limits, and the noun whose gignification is limitea by it ; 
 and if understood, supply it. Put the limiting word in the pos- 
 lessive case. When several words coming together should be in 
 the possessive, or when the name is complex, add the sign of the 
 possessiye ('s) to the proper term. 
 
 The boys book. The girls bonnet. The Ladys book, a 
 birds nest, a bear skin. A mothers tenderness, and a fa- 
 thers care, are natures gifts for mans advantage. A horse 
 tooth. James and Thomas feet are cold. Williams and 
 Marys reign. Sheldon & Company's bookstore is in 
 New York. James loss is Thomas gain. The Farmers 
 Guide. The Scholars Companion. The Court's session 
 is put off. The meeting's president was appointed. 
 
 2. Write short sentences, each of which shall contain two nouns, 
 one limiting the other. Put the limiting word in the proper case. 
 
 Lesson 65. — Subjunctive Mood, 
 
 HuLE XIV. — 1. The subjunctive mood ts 
 used in dependent clause^, when both contin- 
 gency or doubly and futii.ity are expressed; 
 as, "If he eon^mue to study, he will improve." 
 
 2. When contingency/ or doubt only^ and 
 not futurity, is implied^ the indicative is used; 
 as, " If he has money, he keeps it." 
 
 EXPLANATION.— Doubt and futurity are both implied when 
 the auxiliary ihall or should^ referring to future time, can be in- 
 serted before the verb without changing the meaning ; thus, " Though 
 he fall," and "Though he should fall," mean the same thing. It is 
 only in the present tense and third person singular, that there is 
 
 
 
 REMARK. — Many of the best writers, and some distinguished 
 grammarians, often use the subjunctive present, when mere doubt 
 
INEINITIVB MOOD. 
 
 117 
 
 nr oontinirencv 18 expressed, and not futurity. A contrary practice 
 of U8° "^^^^^^^^^^ ^l^«'« both doubt and futuritv are implied. 
 
 2iw ^.^JnVto nrevail • thus, " If he continues to study, he will im- 
 ^Zl'KltihrTeiJTot good authority still.is evidently u 
 F,r of the precedrnt Rules. A general adherence to then. wouM 
 L^ this adKge,'that the mood used would be a certam guide 
 to the sense intended. 
 
 SUB-RULE.-Le8t and that, annexed to a command, re^juire the «u6. 
 junctivemood,- as. " Love not sleep, lest thou come to poverty. 
 
 ••Take heed that thou speak not to Jncob. either good or bad. 
 OBS-The subjunctive mood, in the past tense, expresses a sup. 
 
 position with respect to something present, but implies a denial of 
 
 the thing supposed; as, "If I were a nightingale, I would sing; 
 
 implying, "I am not" , ^^^^^^jg^g. 
 
 In the following sentences, state whether the vorb following " if" 
 or^Uh^^ugh "Xuld be in the subjunctive or indicative mood, and 
 why ; and make the necessary correction. 
 
 If there be a rule it should be observed. Though he 
 hfl rich he is not happy. If the mail arrives to-morrow, 
 we sffia'e ktterr.^f he studies diligently when he 
 n-oes to school, he will improve. If he is discreet when 
 he goes abroad, he will gain friends. It ho liave money, 
 he must have earned it. 
 
 i' 
 
 i-u 
 
 Lesson QQ,— Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Rule XV.— The wfinitive mood is govern- 
 ed by VERBS, NOUNS, or adjectives; as, J^ 
 desire to learn."— |' A desire to learn. — 
 ^^ Anxious to learn." 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 Rule X.^One verb being the subject of another, is put in the in- 
 j:^:*:.,^ . aa «• 7V» Mitiflii ia profitable." 
 
 Rule 2.^0ne verb governs another as its object or co^nplement 
 in the infinitive ; as, " Boys love to play." 
 
 
 ¥■ 
 
ihiw 
 
 118 INTEODFOTION TO ANALYTICAL GRAMMAR. 
 
 Rule Z.—The infinitive, as the subject or object of a verb, some- 
 times has a subject of its own in the objective case; as, " For us to 
 do so, would be improper."—" I know him to be prudent." 
 
 Bulk A.— The infinitive is used as a predicate nominative after 
 4iny verb as a copula ; as, " You are to blamed 
 
 RuLK 5.— To, the sign ofihe infinitive, is not used after the verbs 
 
 BID, DARE, NEED, MAKE, SEE, HEAE, FEEL, and LET, in the OCtiveVOtCe, 
 
 nor after let in the passive: as, " I saw him do it f not " to do it." 
 Rule 6.— The infinitive is used to express the puepose, end, or 
 ©KsiGN of the preceding act ; as, " Some who came to scoff, re- 
 mained to pray.'* « 
 
 Rule 1.— /n eompari&ons, the infinUive mood is put after so— as, 
 TOO, or than; as, "Be so gi»od as to read this."—" Too old to 
 ieara."— " Wiser than to umlertake it." 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. In the following sentences, tell whic]> verb is in the infinitive 
 mood, and wliat governs it. State whether it is the sobjeet or ob- 
 ject of the verb. Insert or omit to, the sign uf the mfiuitive, and 
 give a reason according to the Rule. 
 
 Strive learn. Cease do evil. Learn do well. He 
 needs not to write. I would make you to take care. 
 He dares not to do a wicked action ; nor will he dare 
 do it. I heard him to say so. He was heard say so. Let 
 James to do this. Bid'him to speak to me. Did you 
 see him to do that ? No, but I heard him to do it. 
 Did you hear the bell to ring ? Make him to go. He 
 was made go, 
 
 2. Write short sentences, in each of which shall be one verb in 
 the infinitive mood, as the subject of another verb— as the object 
 
 to express the end or design— with to properly omitted— ^ith a 
 
 subject of its own in the objective case. 
 
 ! i 
 
 Lesson 67. — Construction of Participles, 
 
 Rule XVI. — Participles have the con- 
 truction q/ nouns, adjectives, and verbs- 
 
 Rkm. — ^To participles used in these ways, the Rules of Syntax 
 for noung, adjectives, and verbs, may generally be applied. (See 
 Ad. <& Pr. Gr. 891-907). 
 
 ^Hhlii^ 
 
A.R. 
 
 OONSTEUCTION OF PAETICIPLES. 
 
 119 
 
 I verb, some' 
 " For tts to 
 lent." 
 inative after 
 
 Her the verbs 
 > active voicCy 
 ot " to do it." 
 
 E>OSE, END, or 
 
 to scoffs re- 
 
 after so — as, 
 " Too old to 
 
 the infinitive 
 nbjeet or oW- 
 ifiiiitive, and 
 
 well. He 
 take care. 
 rill he dare 
 ay so. Let 
 Did you 
 n to do it. 
 bo go. He 
 
 e one verb ia 
 19 the object 
 itted — mih a 
 
 Iples, 
 
 the con- 
 
 1 VERBS. 
 
 es of Syntax 
 pplied. (Sc« 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 Rule \.-When thepresent or perfect participle is used as a noun, 
 a noun before it is put in the possessive case; as. - Much dependB 
 on the pupiVs composing frequently." 
 
 PXPLANATION.-The present participle is used as a verbal 
 
 „o!n^'."bSu the BubLt of ^^'^fi^^^^^lll^^Z; 
 «itive verb or preposition. Under tms ruie, lue v»iu» j 
 
 be modified in all respects as the verb. 
 
 Obs 1 -A pronoun before the verbal noun must be the posses- 
 sive pionoun, and not the possessive case; as, "Much depends on 
 your composing frequently," (not yours). 
 
 Rule 2.- When the present participle used as a noun, has an ar- 
 TioLK or ADJECTIVE 6c/ore it, the prepositions follom-r^. By the 
 observing o/ these rules."-" A oom;)Z.f. forsaking of the truth. 
 
 FTTPT AKATION— When used in this way, the participle is re - 
 gafd'^d as\ nfun^st pl^^ and has not the government or modifica- 
 tions of the verb. 
 
 Obs 2.-The sense v,iU often be the same, if both the article and 
 the preposition be omitted; but the one shonld not be om. ted 
 without the omission of the other ; thus, " By observing these rules 
 In some cases, however, these two modes express very different 
 ideas, and therefore attention to the sense is necessary, as directed 
 in the following rule. 
 
 Rn« n.-When the verbal no«« express, .omithing of v,h,ch 
 ,Ke noun/oUomng demote, the BOEa. it .hoM have the ^HcUand 
 tk. preposition; as, " It wa. told in tk. *»"»?«/*;;"7„'- " 
 But Jen it expreeu, eometUng of «,hich the ^un folomngj^' 
 not denote the doer, hU the owner, both .houldbe omMed; as. The 
 court spent much time in hearing the witness." 
 
 Obs 8 -0/- can never be ised after the verbal noun when a pre- 
 position follows if, thus, "By attending to these rules,- can not be 
 changed into, " By the attending of to these rules. 
 
 R»t.»4.-T/« poet participle, and not the pat le«M,houdbe 
 Jdlft^th.au!iliarL h.vb and be, as. " I have »r,«™ > {»"» 
 ^ro<<?)— "The letter ia written" (not wrote), 
 
 R.M.~So also, the past participle should not be "-f ^-^tP^'^ 
 tense; as. "He ran;" not "He run." **!.««;' not I seen. 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 '■^ ti 
 
 
 I 
 
;;'?— >-*Nf»*)W .ii i' » i'i» W < W f 
 
 I I 
 
 120 INTEODTJCTION TO ANALYTICAL GBAMMAR. 
 
 EXPLANATION.— Thi8 Rule can be violated only when the 
 past tense and past participle differ in spelling. 
 
 Obs. 4. — The participle in ing is sometimes used in a passive 
 sense after the verb to be, to express the continued suffering of an 
 action ; ap, " The house is building ;" not is being built. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 (Rule 1). — In the following Exercise, tell which is the verbal 
 noun, and how you know it to be used as such. If a noun stands 
 before it, put that noun in the proper case, and give the Rule. 
 
 My brother being sick, is the cause of his absence. 
 A man making a fortune, depends partly on him pursu- 
 ing a proper course. John attempting too touch* was 
 the cause of his failure. Hers going away was not ob- 
 served. 
 
 (Rule 2).— In the following Exercise, point out the participial 
 noun, and tell how you know it to be so used. See what words are 
 before and after it, and if not right, according to the rule, make 
 them so, and give the rule for the change. ^ 
 
 Learning of any thing well, requires application. The 
 doing our duty is commendable. By reading of good 
 books the mind is improved. Of the making many 
 books there is no end. By exercising of our faculties 
 they are improved. The giving to every man his own 
 is a sacred duty. 
 
 (Rule 3).--Con8ider whether the noun following the present 
 participle denotes the doer, or the object of the act expressed by it, 
 and correct the sentence accordingly. 
 
 At hearing the ear, they shall obey. Because of pro- 
 voking his sons and daughters, the Lord abhorred them. 
 The greatest pain is felt in the cutting of the skin. 
 
 (Rule 4). — 1. In the following Exercise, when the past tense 
 stands after the auxiliary have, or be, change it into the past parti- 
 ciple, and give the rule for the change. 
 
 He should have wrote. Have you spoke to the mas- 
 ter ? I am almost froze. She has just began to read. 
 James has broke his arm. You should have drove more 
 slowly. He has drank too much, and should be took 
 home. He might have rode if he had chose. 
 
 2. Correct the following errors, and give a reason for the change. 
 
 I seen him an hour ago. I done what you told me. 
 
LR. 
 
 jT when the 
 
 in a passive 
 Ofering of an 
 
 3 the verbal 
 Doun stands 
 e Rule. 
 
 a absence, 
 lim pursu- 
 nuch, was 
 as not ob- 
 
 e participial 
 
 lit words are 
 
 rule, make 
 
 tion. The 
 ig of good 
 Aug many 
 p faculties 
 in his own 
 
 the present 
 ►ressed by it, 
 
 uae of pro- 
 rred them, 
 skin. 
 
 le past tense 
 le past parti- 
 
 the mas- 
 an to read, 
 drove more 
 lid be took 
 
 r the change. 
 3U told me. 
 
 THE OEDEE OF TIME. 
 
 121 
 
 't if 
 
 James run a mile in ten minutes, and had not began to 
 be tired. The school begun yesterday. He ought to 
 have went, or at least to have wrote. That is wrong, 
 you had not ought to done it. 
 
 3 Write Phort sentences, in each of which shall be one of the 
 following verbs, in the present-perfect or past-perfect indicative 
 activl viz., begin, run, write, freeze, eat, drink. Parse the sen- 
 tences, and apply the Rule. 
 
 4 Write short sentences, with the following verbs in the passive 
 voice ; viz., write, begin, shake, sink, speak, give. Parse them, and 
 apply the Rule. 
 
 Lesson 6Q.— The Order of Time. 
 
 Utile XVII.— J^ the use of verbs, and 
 words that in point of time relate to each ^ 
 other, the order of time must he observed ; as, 
 " I have known liim these many years" — not 
 '« I know liim these many years." 
 
 EXPLAN A.TION.— This Rule is general, and here also the sense 
 is the best guide. The following principles may be noticed in this 
 place : 
 
 1. That which is always true, is expressed in the present tense. 
 
 2. That which is past, but viewed as continued in the present, is 
 expressed in the present-perfect tense. 
 
 3 Verbs having the auxiliaries shall, will, may, can, can be asso- 
 ciated in a sentence with other verbs in the present only; those 
 with might, could, would, should, with verbs m the past. 
 
 4 The present infinitive expresses what is cotemporary with, or 
 subsequent to, the time of the governing verb ; the perfect infinitive 
 expresses what is antecedent to that time. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. In the following sentences, point out the verb which is wrong 
 in respect of tense. Put it in the proper tense, and tell why it is 
 changed. . 
 
 It was said that fever always produced thirst ; that 
 heat always expanded metals ; and that truti^ was im- 
 mutable. He is now absent a week. I have been abroad 
 
 
 
 .a 
 
 n« 
 
 ir 
 
■fclr^ 
 
 122 INTEODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL QBAMMAB. 
 
 last year. If Le would lend mc that book, I will be 
 obliged to bim. He can do it if he would. I intended 
 to have written ; but I still hoped he would have come. 
 Eome is said to be built seven hundred years before the 
 Christian era. Nero is said to persecute the Christians. 
 He has been gone long before I knew it. 
 
 2. Write short eentences, and express, in each, something -which 
 you hoped, feared, desired, intended, to do yesterday, before yester- 
 day ; — which you hope, fear, &c., to do to-day, to-morrow. Also 
 "what some one did yesterday,— before yesterday, — always does, — 
 does now, — has just now done, — will do to-morrow, — before to- 
 morrow night. 
 
 Ijesson 69. — Construction of Adverbs, 
 
 E/ULE XVIII. — Adverbs modify verbs, 
 ADJECTIVES, and other adverbs ; as, ** John 
 speaks disti/nctly ; he is remarkably diligent^ 
 and reads very correctly J"^ 
 
 special rules. 
 
 Rule 1. — Adverbs should not be used as adjectives, nor adjectives 
 as adverbs ; as, " The preceding (not the above) extract." 
 
 Rule 2. — Two negatives are equivalent to an affirmative, and 
 should not be used unless affirmation is intended; as, "I can not 
 drink any (not no) more ;" or, " I can drink no more." 
 
 Rule 3. — Adverbs are for tho most part placed before adjectives, 
 
 after a verb in the simple form j and after the first auxiliary in the 
 
 compound form ; as, "He is very attentive, behaves well, and is 
 
 muth esteemed. 
 
 EXPLANATION.— This is to be considered only as a general 
 Rule, to which there are mnny excepti^jns. Indeed no rule for the 
 position of the adverb can be given, which is not liable to excep- 
 tions. The best direction for the use of this Rule, is to place the 
 adverb where the sense requires, having due regard to the harmony 
 
 . ip J.1 i.^^^^ 'PVkSM 1}m«1 A A.^.^1 1 ACS fr. n/liiinAl'a rkt* ootro»*V\ia1 v\ni.aa« 
 
 €8, as well as to adverbs. 
 Ob8. 1 . — Where should not be used for in which, except when the 
 
[ will be 
 Intended 
 ve come, 
 efore the- 
 iristians. 
 
 ling "t^hich 
 3re yester- 
 ow. Also 
 ys does,— 
 before to- 
 
 THE OEBEB OF TIME. 
 
 12a 
 
 r. 
 VERBS, 
 
 '' John 
 iligenty 
 
 ' adjectivei 
 
 ativey and 
 '* I can not 
 
 adjectives^ 
 iary in the 
 tell, and is 
 
 3 a general 
 rule for the 
 e to excep* 
 :> place the 
 )e harmony 
 
 )t when the 
 
 reference ie to place; as, "The situation in which (not trA^^) 1 left 
 him ;" because « situation" does not here refer to pJace. 
 
 Ob8 2. -So is often used elliptically for an adjedlve, a noun, or a 
 whole sentence ; as, « They are rich ; we are not «o ."-"H. i» a good 
 scholar, and I told you »o." 
 
 Obs. 8.-0n;y, «o/%, chiefly, merely, too, also, and perhapg afew 
 others, are sometimes joined to substantives; as, "Not only ih^ 
 men, but the women also were prepent." 
 
 Obs 4 —A negative is often made by the syllables dis, in, im,un, 
 &c., prefixed to a word. When this is the case, another negative, 
 is sometimes used, to express a diminished kind of affirmation; as, 
 « He was not unkind." The negative terras are such as no, not, 
 neither, nor, never, &c. 
 
 For a fuller account of the construction and use of adverbs, see 
 An. & Pr. Gr. 923-948. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Adverbs being undeclinable, mistakes are liable to be made chief- 
 ly tn l efr posuln ; or in using as adverbs, words that are not ^o ; 
 or in usin- adverbs where other words are required. Correct the 
 errors in the following sentences, as the Rules require :-~ 
 
 rRuLF n.-l. Point out the modifying words in the following 
 sentences!^ If not adverb., make them .0, and give the Rule. 
 
 Come quick, n^ames does that very good. That was 
 done excellent. Time moves rapid. Apparent slow peo- 
 pie accomplish much if sufficieijt steady. You can read 
 excellent well. It is real cold." 
 
 2 In the following point out the adverb improperly used. Show 
 ^vhy it is so; change it for the proper term, and give the Uule. 
 
 Thine often infirmities. Come the soonest day possi- 
 ble. The soonest time will be late enough. The then 
 ministry opposed the measure. The condition where I 
 found him was truly bad. He was here last year, since 
 when I have not seen him. 
 
 3. Write short sentences, each of which shall contain an^ad verb 
 on 31), modifying a verD or aajeciive, auu ^^^ v^..v .. .^ 
 directed in Rule 3d and Explanation. 
 
 -It 
 ii'i 'i 
 
 
 (see L 
 placed 
 
^vTii! 
 
 »l 
 
 124 INTEODUOTION TO ANALTTIOAL GEAMMAE. 
 
 (Rule 2).— 1. Point out the two negatives in the following sen- 
 tences. Show why they are wrong; correct them, and give the 
 Rule. 
 
 1 can not eat no more. He is not able to walk no 
 further. We can not do that in no way. He will never 
 be no taller. Never do nothing of the kind. Time and 
 tide will not wait for no man. No man never did that. 
 You must not drink no more. 
 
 2. Make short sentences, each of which shall contain one of the 
 following words : worthy, just, discreet, kind, obliging, agreeable, 
 happy, firm, Ac. Then prefix to these words the appropriate nega- 
 tive prefix mentioned above. Then insert a negative word in each 
 sentence, and mark the difference of meaning with each change; 
 thus, *'He is a worthy man, *'He is an unworthy man," " He is not 
 an unworthy man." 
 
 (Rule 3).— 1. In the following sentences, place the adverb as the 
 Rule directs, provided the sense will thereby be clearly expressed. 
 
 A man industrious eminently. He is agreeable always. 
 He sweetly sings, charmingly converses, and prudently 
 conducts himself on all occasions. He unaffectedly 
 spoke. He manfully has contended for the prize, and 
 certainly will obtain it. Time will wait never. He could 
 have not done it. He will be always trusty. That dis- 
 aster might have easily been prevented. That piece 
 was evacuted beautifully. 
 
 2 The following sentences have the adverb placed according to 
 the Rule, but the sense and harmony of the sentence evidently re- 
 quire it to be in a different position. 
 
 Men contend frequently for trifles. I only saw three 
 persons. Of the books I sent him, he only read one. 
 James can very well read. You should slowly write. 
 He might plainly have told him. He not only saw her 
 pleased, but greatly pleased. 
 
 3. Write a number of short sentences, each of which shall coo- 
 tain one or more adverbs correctly placed. [See List, Lesson 81.] 
 
 4. Write short sentences, each of which shall contain one of the 
 t^w^T^incf aflvflrbs- viz- onlv. merely, solely, chiefly, first, at least, 
 ^'d teif the word which they modify. Place the adverbs in as 
 many different positions, in each sentence as you can, so as to make 
 sense, and mark the change of meaning. 
 
t. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 125 
 
 wing sen- 
 i give tlie 
 
 walk no 
 ill never 
 Dime and 
 did that. 
 
 one of the 
 agreeable, 
 riate nega- 
 )rd in each 
 h change; 
 " He is not 
 
 srerb as the 
 expressed. 
 
 ie always, 
 jrudently 
 iffectedly 
 >rize, and 
 He could 
 That dis- 
 hat piece 
 
 ccording to 
 ddently re- 
 
 saw three 
 read one. 
 vly write. 
 y saw her 
 
 h shall con- 
 Lesson 81.] 
 
 n one of the 
 rst, at least, 
 Iverbs in as 
 } as to make 
 
 Lesson 10.— Conjunctions. 
 
 Rule XIX.,— Covj unctions connect words, 
 PHRASES, or SENTENCES ; as, *^ He and I must 
 go; but you mvij stay," 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 Rule I. ^Conjunctions connect the same moods and tenses of 
 , ,erbs, and causes of nouns and pronouns;^ as. " Do good, and seek 
 peace."— "Honor thy father and mother^ 
 
 EXPLANATION— The reason of this Rule is, that words thus 
 Jn^c^t™lr^^^^ most part in the same construcUon jhat^J 
 
 Zns connected must be in the same ease, ^^««^"«^^*^7„„*^^,"rb oV 
 natives to the same verb, or governed by the same noun, verD, or 
 TrStl; and verbs thus connected bave usual y he same nom- 
 inative. In respect of case, errors occur chiefly m the use of pre 
 nouns. 
 
 Obs 1. When conjunctions connect diflferent moods and teneeB, 
 or Tvhen a contrast is stated with but, not, thmigh, Ac, the nornma- 
 tive is generally repeated; as, "He may return, but he will not 
 remain." 
 
 Obs. 2. The relative after than, is usually in the objective case ; 
 
 as, "Alfred, than whom, Ac 
 
 Obs. 8. After verbs of doubting, fearing, denying, the conjunc- 
 tion that should be used, and not lest, but, but that; as. "They 
 feared that (not lest) he would die." 
 
 Obs 4. In the compound tenses, verba connected in the same 
 tense, have the auxiliary expressed with the first, and understood 
 to the rest ; as. " John can read, write, and spell." When different 
 tenses are connected, the auxiliary must always be expressed; as, 
 •* He has come, but he will not stay." 
 
 R0L« 2,— Certain words in the antecedent member of a sentenee, 
 require corresponding connectives in the subsequent one: thus, 
 1. In clauses or words simply connected— 
 
 Both requires and; as, *'Both he and I came." 
 
 ^... . ..» ttwith^^ Vift or I will come.** 
 
 MUfier -~ ^' > "°» ^" — " ,^ 
 
 :treither nor; as, ''Neither he nor I came. 
 
 Whether or; as, " WlkOier he or I camej^ 
 
 11 
 
 1 . 
 
 1 ■ 
 
 h 
 

 **^ '-.f- lafrmrn. 
 
 126 INTRODUCTION TO ANAIA'TICAL GEAMMAH. 
 
 Though 
 N'ot only 
 
 yet ; as, '^Though he slay me, yet will I trust 
 iu biin." 
 
 hut aUo; as, "JNTof only he, 6m< a^so his bro- 
 iher goes." 
 2 In clauses connected so as to imply comparison- 
 
 The c.»par«<« d.gne requhes <Aan .• a,. " He .s ialln than 
 
 I am. , 1 .» 
 
 OM^r requires iUn ; as, •' It is no otUr than he. 
 
 Mse 
 As 
 
 As 
 So 
 So 
 Such 
 
 <Aan • as, " What ehe do you expect than thisl 
 «, (expressiDg .(/i^aZ^yJ); as. -He is as tall as . 
 
 «o (eTpiessinj? ../"^^^''l/);, ^^' "^^ ^^^ ^"^ "' 
 
 80 shall thy strength be. 
 as (^ith a negative, expressing tw^^J^f* ?)' *«' 
 
 " He is not so learned a« his brother. 
 <Aa< (expressing conse^wencc); as, "He is so 
 
 weak, //ia« he cannot walk, 
 a, (expressing *imtoi<y); as, *'He.or such 
 
 as he." 
 
 NoT..-^. and .0, in the members of aoomparison, are properly 
 "txPLANATION.-This Hule.-a-, that -hen a-y "^he ^ 
 SrS Sm Si rfX me:r ° Afte, .. tno^K' 
 
 ^! It d^S'ln* buiconnecUd anteced.«t clau.e,, it must be 
 7Jv l;;«if^" *<"^.- -- "^-ha-or. always has been, and 
 
 two sentences. If both of ^1^^ s^^.^^^^^.^fj^^l j^ right-if not, it is 
 and express the sense ^^^^^^^^V^^^ ^^^"^^^^^^^^ 
 wrong, and must be c«"^«?f * J„^"'£^^^^^^^ add the member 
 he can not, be censured " is wrong, because ny ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ 
 « &e cmsuri'd," to the first clause, it will roaKe j^^^^ 
 
 eLuredr which is i"«o"-^?^/,;^?^S ' W' ^^^^^^^^ "has not." 
 XVI. This must be corrected by '°?^'^^^^f "\ censured." The 
 I as to read, " He ha,s^not been.^-J^^^S^^^^^ 
 different clauses buuuiu u^ ^.-..--j - - - 
 
 This Rule is often violated in sentences m ^*f Vw'He WM 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 127 
 
 intrust 
 his bro- 
 
 iUer than 
 
 lan this?" 
 as tall a» . 
 
 ly day is, 
 
 ality); as, 
 er." 
 'He is so 
 
 e, or such 
 
 d properly 
 
 of the cor- 
 itence, the 
 " though!* 
 
 nee, is corn- 
 it must be 
 3 been, and 
 
 jes are cor- 
 itence com- 
 as to make 
 EiUy correct, 
 -if not, it is 
 bas not, and 
 the member 
 has not be 
 under Rule 
 r "has not," 
 ared." The 
 atioQ. 
 
 lere are two 
 
 us, " He was 
 
 Here, " a* 
 
 Cinthior is applicable to the clause "«o mnchadmiredr but can 
 not be connecfJJl with -n.or« helovedr ^\'^^\T'TT^!r^^X' 
 the proper way is to complete the construcLiou of the fii-st member, 
 andkave that of the second understood; as '' He was n«ore be- 
 loved than Ciuthio, but not so much admired (as Cinthio). 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 (Role U— 1 In the following, point out the connected v«rbs. 
 If Ihey haV; the same oominati/e, ^ut them in the -me mood and 
 tense If they must be in diflferent moods or tenses, repeat the 
 nomtnatfve ; a'nd if that is a noun, repeat it by ts pronoun Pomt 
 out the couiected nouns or pronouns, and put them m the same 
 case. 
 
 He reads and wrote well.* If be say it, and does it, 
 I am content. If be be at home, and is well, give bim 
 the letter. Mv father has read the book, and will re- 
 turn it to-morrow. James and me ran all the way. 
 That is a small matter between you and I. Him and i 
 are great friends, and so are Mary and me. Nobody 
 knows that better than her and me. 
 
 2. Write short sentences, in which two or more verbs are con- 
 neSed in the same mood and tense, and notice Particularly Obs. 4 
 Put the verbs in the premU^m the pa«<-and m the premit-per/ect, 
 L Tpress the sa^me ideas, with the verbs in the passive voice 
 
 3. Write sentences containing two or more ^er^s in different 
 moods and tenses, paying attention to Obs. ^ ; J l^^ J. f ^^e cTe 
 taining two or more nouns or pronouns connected m the same ease. 
 
 (Rule 2).-1. Point out the corresponding terms j? ^J^® fo^I^^^^^^^^ 
 sentences make the second correspondent to the first, or the tirst 
 to the seco^S as the sense requires. Supply the correspondent 
 term where improperly omitted. . ..n i. 
 
 He will not do it himself, nor let another doii for him. 
 Though he slay me, so will I trust in him. That is so 
 far as I am able to go. This book is equally good as 
 that one. P^othing is so bad as it can not be worse 
 He was not only diligent, but successful in his studies. 
 It is neither cold or hot. 
 
 2 Write correct sentences, each of which shall contain one pair 
 of tbe corresponding terms above, and state what they express. 
 
 .<i. In the following sentences, point out the comparative^degree. 
 or other correspondent terms, and make tbe one correspuuu .« .»e 
 other, according to the Rule. # 
 
 H 
 
 In 
 
128 INTKOBTJOTION TO AKALTTIOAL GBA NMA 
 
 James writes better as I do. There were more besideB 
 him med ia that business. No more but two can 
 S at this game. The days are longer m Bummer be- 
 £ they are in winter. Has James no other book but 
 This ? This is Buch conduct that I did not expect. It 
 can be no other but he. They had no other book except 
 this one. I would rather read as write. He had no 
 sooner done the mischief but he repented . 
 
 proper coneBpondent term. 
 
 (Ro« 8).-Mivke trial o( the folloW.Dg 8eutenca9,«» directed . a 
 the explanatioD. If either of the clauses, when joined with the 
 ^^mber of the sentence common to both, niakes a grammafca. 
 error, point it out and correct It. 
 
 He always has, and he always will, be punctual. They 
 
 fCth^an I expected '^^1^^^^-^^^'^'^^:^ 
 T'^H: depend r-co'nfiZin'^W' is as correct as 
 f. He crnfidef and depends upon "«•" I^^^iti' 
 not BO feeble as Thomas. Warm weather is P'easaw, 
 Sut not so bracing as cold. Iron is more nseful, but 
 not so valuable as gold or silver. 
 
 Lesson 11.— Interaction*. 
 
 Rule XK.—Interjectiom have no gram- 
 matical connection with the other words m a 
 sentence. 
 
 After interiecUone, pronouns of the first person pre pommonlyin 
 Z r^nVSVeln 'epenrloting the person addressed. 
 
GENE UAL IITJLB. 
 
 129 
 
 besides 
 wo can 
 ner be- 
 )ok but 
 ct. It 
 except 
 had no 
 
 i word in 
 ;d by the 
 
 irected in 
 
 with tbe 
 
 kinmatical 
 
 1. They 
 , but not 
 i, though 
 it not 80 
 ' will say 
 >rrect as, 
 Ider, but 
 pleasant, 
 eful, but 
 
 ) gram- 
 *ds in a 
 
 jmmonly in 
 re ; as, " Ah 
 ; depend on 
 the govera- 
 they are in 
 issed. 
 
 Lesson ^2.— ^^"^''^^ -^w^*^- 
 In every sentence, the toords employed, and 
 the order in which they are arranged, should 
 be such as clearly and preperly to express the 
 idea intended; and, at the same time, all the 
 parts of the sentence should correspond, ana 
 a regular and dependent construction be ob^ 
 served throughout. 
 
 See Analytical and Practical Grammar, 973 to 976. 
 
 EXPLANATION.-This may be regarded as a gen«»;^l "Jj«^ 
 annlicable to every case, and therefore coraprehendmg a 11 the pre- 
 cE Though these embrace almost everything belonging to 
 Se p^riper co^str^^^^^ of sentences, yet there will sometimes 
 ^cu? instances of impropriety in the use, and arrangement, and 
 Sction of words, for the avoiding or correcting of which no 
 very specific rules can be given. 
 
 Among the evils to be guarded against under this Rule, are the 
 following, — 
 
 1 The use of words which do not correctly or properly convey 
 the idea intended, or which convey another with equal pro- 
 
 priety. i. *v • 
 
 2, The arrangement of words or clauses in Buch a way tbat their 
 
 relation to other words and clauses is doubtful, or difficult 
 
 to be perceived. j i . 
 
 3 The separating of adjuncts from their principals, and placing 
 
 them so thatVey may be joined to words to which they do 
 
 not belong. . 
 
 4. The separating of relative clauses improperly from their 
 
 antecedents. 
 6. Using injudiciously, or too frequently, the third personal or 
 
 poslessive pronoGn, especially in indirect discourse. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 PYPL AN ATION.—The following sentences are not grammati- 
 canyTnc<frfe™^ some of tfe causes -ntione^^a^^^^^ axe 
 obscure, inelegant, smbiguous, or unintelligible. Point out tne 
 iCpTopriety, correct it, and give a reason for the correction. 
 
 m The Greeks fearing to be surrounded on all sidea^ 
 wheeled about, and halted with the river on their back. 
 
 
.130 IKIBODDOTION TO ANALITIOAI, OBAMMAB. 
 
 /2^ Parmenio had served, with creat fidelity Philip, the 
 father of ICander, as ^vell a. himself, for whom he first 
 oS the way into Asia. (3) Lost a new umbrella be- 
 fonrine to a gentleman with a curiously carved ivory head. 
 . 4^%°fudiSs^as canonized among the gods, who scarcely 
 ^deser ed the name of n,an. (5) A farmer went to a law- 
 yer and told him that his bull had gored his ox. 
 
 Lesson IZ.—Mlipsui. 
 Rtjlb \.~An Ellipsis, or omission of 
 words, is admissible, when they can be sup- 
 plied by the mind with such certainty and 
 readiness as not to obscure the sense. iHus. 
 
 T . ,J .f p.vlnir " He wa' a learned man, and be was a wise 
 Instead of saying, P°™7, » He was a learned, wise, 
 
 man, and he was a good man ; we say, no"" 
 
 and good man.*' 
 TjvDT A w 4TTOV —There is a constant tendency among men to 
 
 fore, a word can be «pared from a senience ^ 
 
 atndy till twelve hours of he «'»*"","'" '^Jn'-go to school at. 
 ,cll understood)," I rise 'l',?"'i,^ f V^'' ^f /^ of abbreviated 
 mne. and study lU twelve Th« ^e ongm ^^_^^_^_^_j ^^^^.^ 
 
 ;tSarilSr:£. ICdsl^ft out must be supplied. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 1 In the following sentences, leave out such words as may be 
 •omitted without obscuring the sense. 
 
 He had an affectionate father ^^\^\^f'l''^^ 
 mother. Tou -ay read, or you may write,^as^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 gTden. He would neither go, nor would he send. 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 131 
 
 p, the 
 le first 
 11a be- 
 dhead, 
 jarcely 
 alaw- 
 
 m of 
 3 sup- 
 f and 
 Thus, 
 
 X9 a wise 
 ed, wise, 
 
 \g men to 
 rer, there- 
 juring its 
 is. Thus, 
 rise at six 
 urs of the 
 slock, and 
 le equally 
 school at 
 ibreviated 
 and their 
 )plied. 
 
 as may be 
 
 Bctionate 
 ►u please. 
 e been at 
 ise and a 
 end. 
 
 2. In the following s.atenoes, supply the words Utt out. .o « to 
 show their full coiistruotiou. 
 
 It is Bix O'clock i we .nay stttdy tffl «evc». We have 
 J if >,nf TAii have not. John will read and ihomas 
 tXttt^l'^ThUwle is larger than t^at b"* -^^^^ 
 TwPPt, Give this apple to James, that to Robert, ana 
 Z other trMa V. '^ I have heard and read much about 
 WasMnRt n fnd the Kevolution. "Sun stand thou still 
 upon Gibeon ; and thou. Moon, in the valley of Ajalon. 
 
 Lesson l^.—MUpsia not AUowahle. 
 
 Htjlb I'—An ellipsis is not allowable, 
 when it would obscure the sentence, weaken 
 Us force, w he attended with an impropriety ; 
 for example, — 
 
 we have seen." j i,«„ 
 
 T?YPT ANATION— The sense will always be obscured, when 
 
 EXrLAiNiviiv^i^. ^"J: ". x,^ -„atriif Hon of the sentence 18 
 
 on account of improper ellipsis, the f^f ™^° ^' Vived. When 
 
 rendered doubtful, or is not clearly and »:ea?»ly P/^^f '^^^'^^ ^ho 
 
 -^::t^1Kt^SttW£^^ 
 
 '*A horse and an ass." 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 In the following sentences, point out the improper ellipsis, 
 why it is improper, and correct it. 
 
 Cicero made orations, both on public and private oo^- 
 sions He is the most diligent scholar 1 ever knew. 
 Zu haft that is thine. Thine the kingdom, the power, 
 and"he glory. Depart in peace, be je warn'e'i «lothed, 
 tnd mief . I gladly' shunned who gladly fled from me. 
 That is tbe best can be said oi mm. ^^<= "»= " "r;;:„_, 
 orchard. We must all go the way we shall not return. 
 
 Show 
 
 HI 
 
.^u&iietM^m&Mmii^>d:i «m»^-' 
 
 't^l»mm>lm:t 
 
 u 
 
 132 INTEODVCTION TO ATSALYTICAL QBAMMAB. 
 
 Lesson nb.-Model of Syntactical Parsing. 
 
 word «'y"»»'«S'«''"y'i''!L the rules by which these relations are 
 ,„rds in *e seoce ee and the^;^^^^^^^^^ .ame sentenee pavB- 
 
 Tet^^i JcX Sson 81. is here parsed syntaet.eaUy 
 
 "Give instruction to a ^i^e man, and he will be yet 
 
 wiser." . .y.^ 
 
 .. Give" is a verb, transitive, irregular; give, gave, g.ven , in the 
 '""•i:p:.:tiv; active, second person -gu -• -^ "8 - -* 
 its nominative thou, understood. Bnle VIII. A 
 
 :.ln,trur?is:ooun.ne«ter,intheobj^e..g«lar.govemed 
 
 V- • - Pnlfl X "A transitive verb, «o. 
 ^.M'V;::po'tia expresses the relation between.l«and 
 
 ....ir;:;:^Stlongs to»«. and showsittobe 
 ^' u"d indefinitely. Rule III. " Th-rtic e a or a^ .s put, Ac 
 
 ..Wi.e» is an adjective, compared, m>e, romr, «««(, and n 
 """•prLs a qiality^f man. Bulell. .-An adjective or par- 
 
 ..M.n,'ut'noan; ma«,uline, in the objective singular, governed 
 
 w * RnlftXI "A preposition governs, Ac. 
 ..Aod'-fsa'co^-tS copufatiJe. and connects the two clauses. 
 
 'unleXIX. "Conjunctions connect," Ac. 
 "He- UatM rpersonj pronoun, masculine, in the nommaUv., 
 ItlsLds instead of m.«, with which it agrees Rule 
 
 IV .~uns agree." Ac., and is the subject or nom;nat.v. 
 of .«» 6.. Role VI. " The subject of a Bnito verb, Ac. 
 .WIUh". a verb,intran,itive, irregular ; am, '-.^rj -*J 
 fi^U indicaUve; third person. -g"l« i -<« '^^^ verb 
 subject he. with which it .grees. Rate VII. A 
 
 ..Tet,"Tradt:;b. modifying »;.- Rule XVIII. "Adverb. 
 
 modify," Ac. ,=...,.„.„.„;., „i,w.i«»frt; 
 
 "Wiser," is an adjective, comparouv^ "'5;- > — ' , • „ . 
 iidbelorgs to m«»,oHs predicated of**. Rule II. An 
 
 adjective or participle," Ac. 
 
PEOMISCUOTJS EXEB0I8ES. 
 
 133 
 
 r. 
 
 ing the 
 to other 
 ions are 
 ce pars- 
 be yet 
 
 ; in the 
 ees vf'ith. 
 'A Terb 
 
 roveiTied 
 give and 
 
 B it to be 
 put," Ac. 
 and ez- 
 re or par- 
 governed 
 o claases. 
 
 (ininative, 
 ees. Bule 
 ominative 
 rb,"Ac. 
 en ; in the 
 irms of its 
 " A verb 
 
 *♦ Adverbs 
 
 aer. toiiftt ; 
 eli. "An 
 
 Questions similar to those suggested at the close of Lesso. 37, 
 to LESSON 88 or take f^/ P^^^Sg^^^^^^^ in the school, 
 
 I^esson ne^-Promiscuous Exercises on the Rules of 
 •" Syntax. 
 
 In order t. correct the flowing Exerd^^^^^ ^l^^^J^^l^Z 
 tence carefully, and ««« ^^^f^^^^iVveTb wi!k its no^^^ 
 ^ords that should ^g/^^t.f^f^TTthrpronoun personal and rela- 
 numeral adjective with its "^^^^T,^ ^hXr nouns and pronouns 
 tive, with its ^^''^^J^^^^l''^^^^^ and lastly, 
 
 are in the case which the ^^^^g^'^f'X order which the Bules re- 
 whether the wdtds are arranged »« J^« f^J^^^"^ j^e the Rule for 
 ^uTre. Having found t^e e^ror, ^^^fji^^f^^, i„ the time of 
 the correction. Jbese Exercises wn .^^^ i^g. 
 
 ai\?S our ideas are of^n^t^mp^^^^^^^ 
 
 -''-■ SC«er Zt :AKtas a.aluab| 
 evinced the most extreme vamty. ihe trees are 
 
 "^2 He acted bolder than was expected. "^^^.^ 
 .h'oI^eTebook.^. El^jwa^^^^^^^^ 
 
 f ^/dird"ii% K be^^Ie" Tarn sati^^^^^^ 
 S^rtS^f were" t church ^^l^^-^tt 
 
 X X^t^olfXl Rr^'Sf tree which I have 
 ''T. re?he and I read the next chapt.. ^She is f- of 
 &se!rtryrun13^;b^b;^. Tou wasvery 
 
 H 
 
 1!' 
 
 Ill 
 
 u 
 
 
■-;•.?#» 
 
 sma 
 
 1 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^i^^^B Ik 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 
 ffl 
 
 fl^HlD 
 
 II 
 
 flIHi 
 
 11 
 
 W| 
 
 11 
 
 mBI 
 
 11 
 
 BBfl^^Sj^^l 
 
 li 
 
 ^^^k ' "^^IBk 
 
 1 11 
 
 134 INTEODTTOTIOK TO UTALTTIOiLL GEAMMAE. 
 
 kind to him, he said. "Well, says I, what does thou 
 
 ihink of him now ? James is one of those hoys that was 
 
 kept in at school, for bad behaviour. Thou, James, will 
 
 deny the deed. Neither good nor evil come of them- 
 
 eelves. We need not to be afraid. It is all fell down. 
 
 4. He expected to have gained more by the bargain. 
 
 Ton should drink plenty of goat milk. It was him who 
 
 Bpoke first. Do you like ass milk ? Is it me that you 
 
 mean? Who did you buy your grammar from ? If one 
 
 takes a wrong method at first setting out, it will lead 
 
 them astray. Neither man nor woman were present. 1 
 
 am more taller than you. She is the same lady who sang 
 
 80 sweetly. After the most straitest sect of our religion, i 
 
 lived a Pharisee. Is not thy wickedness gf eat ? and thine 
 
 iniquities infinite ? There is six that studies grammar. 
 
 Lesson 77. — Punctuation. 
 
 PuNOTUAtiON is the art of dividiug a writtea <»?™P<ji"j° ^°^ 
 jZZTr PTts of Bentencee. by points or « W^° .^-f er to con- 
 Tey to the reader the exact aense. and assist him in the proper 
 deHvery, The principal stops are the following :- 
 
 The comma ( . ) the semicolon ( ; ) the colon ( : ) the period or 
 foU stop n thVno^ of interrogation ( ? ) the note of excWation 
 CI) the parenthesise) and the dash ( — ) 
 
 The comma represents the shortest pause ; the ^/mjcolon a pause 
 double ttiat of the comma; the colon, a pause double that of the 
 sSlon; and the period, a pause double that of the colon. 
 
 The duration of the pauses must be left to the taste of the reader 
 
 ^^'SrCoMMA usually separates those parts of a sentence which 
 th^gh ve?;^ciriy ^nnected in sense and construction, require a 
 vanse between them. 
 
 The Semicolon is used to separate the parts of a sentence, which 
 ar Jless cTosTy c^^^ thii those wW are separated by a 
 
 comma. . i. 
 
 The Ooioii ia used to divide a sentence mtp two or more parts, 
 l„?eonneXd"h«n those ^hieh are separated by a .emicolon ; but 
 ^ _x „ '-J ^..Aan^ aa fn ppniiire a oerioa. 
 
 The Peeiod a used when a sentence is complete, witli respect to 
 the »nfSn and the sense intended ; as, " Sod made aU tUgs. 
 
oes thou 
 that was 
 imes, "will 
 of them- 
 bU down. 
 
 '. bargain, 
 him who 
 that you 
 ? If one 
 will lead 
 esent. I 
 who sang 
 religion, I 
 and thine 
 grammar. 
 
 CAPITALS. 
 
 135 
 
 >08itioo ioto 
 rder to cob- 
 the proper 
 
 be period or 
 exclamatioD 
 
 >lon, a pause 
 ) that of the 
 coloD. 
 if the reader 
 
 tence which 
 on, require a 
 
 tence, which 
 larated hy a 
 
 r more parts, 
 micolon ; but 
 
 "^o^M punctuation, see An. & Pr. Gram. 990. 4.. 
 
 Lesson nS.— Capitals. 
 
 2SS^:ntE:t^t;^^^-^:«^= 
 
 n' tr;™Mi:aVitran.e. of pe-sons, p..es. ships. ^ 
 : Konoun >,«ud the interjection O.are wrut.n >n cap.tal 
 3. The first ^s'ord of every line in poetiy. 
 6 The appellations of the Deity ; «s. God. Most H.gh. the At 
 
 r=:r:r =; ^.-o^^tie.,^^ 
 
 I. Every substantive and P™«'P«1 ^.f ^"o/^nlS^' De^^ 
 as "Euclid 8 Elements of beomeiry, 
 
 ^felother words beddesthep-^^^^^^ 
 
 tal8, when they arc remarkably emphatic, oi F i 
 
 of the composition. 
 
 T: 
 
 >' 
 
 th respect to 
 le all things." 
 
 ^.■*'. 
 
136 INTEODUOTION TO Alf ALTTICA.L GBAMMAE. 
 
 PART rOURTH.— PROSODY. 
 
 Lesson 1^.— Prosody, 
 
 Prosody consists of two parts ; Elocution 
 and Versification, 
 
 I. ELOCUTION. 
 
 Elocution is correct pronunciation, or 
 the proper management of the voice in 
 reading or speaking, and comprises Accenty 
 Quantity, Emphasis, Fause, and Tone. 
 
 II. VERSIFICATION. 
 
 Versification is the arrangement of a 
 certain number of long and short syllables 
 according to certain rules. Composition so 
 arranged is called Verse or Foetry. 
 
 Vkrse is of two kinds ; Rhyme and Blank Verae, Rhyme is a 
 similarity of sound in the last syllables of two or more lines ar- 
 ranged in a certain order. Poetry consisting of such Imes is some- 
 times called Rhyme. Blank versk is poetry without rhyme. 
 
 Every verse or line of poetry consists of a certain number of 
 parts ciled Feet. The arrangement of these feet in a ^^f J^P^jd- 
 fng to the accent, is called Metre; aM the dividing of a Une into 
 its°component feet is called Scanning. 
 
 All feet used in poetry are reducible to eight kinds ; four of two 
 syllables, and four of three syllables ; the long syllable being marked 
 by a straight line (— ) and the short, by a curve, (—) as follows : 
 
 DISSYLLABLE. 
 
 A Trochee — '— ' 
 An Iambus— — 
 
 A Spondee 
 
 A Pyrrhic •>^ — ' 
 In English, accented syliables are long, uaaocontad are short. 
 The Metres in most common use, are the Iambic^ TrochaiOt and 
 Anapaestic. 
 
 TBISSYLLABLE. 
 
 A Dactyl — v^ — 
 An Amphibrach w — 
 An Anapsets w^ ^-^ — 
 A Tribrach www 
 
COMPOSITION. 
 
 137 
 
 ution 
 
 n, or 
 ce in 
 ccenty 
 
 1 of a 
 lables 
 Loa so 
 
 ijme IS a 
 I lines ar- 
 \ is some* 
 jrme. 
 
 amber of 
 16 accord- 
 > line into 
 
 ur of two 
 g marked 
 tollowa : 
 
 ; BUV7XDI 
 
 ihaiCt and 
 
 Iambic Metre is adapted to grave and serious subjects; it has 
 the secind fourth, and other evin syllables, accented or long; and 
 Se first third and other uneven syllables "P^cc^nte^'J «^°^,.,^/ 
 this verse there are various kinds, some having two feet, some three, 
 sol frur,so^^^^^^ This la^tiscalled Heroic measure, and is the 
 same that is used by Milton, Young, Thompson, Pollok, &c. 
 
 When the last line of a stanza is extended to six feet, it is called 
 
 rEooHAio Metee is quick and lively, and adapted to gay wd 
 cheerful composition. It comprises verses of one and a half, two 
 ?free,LrTve! and sometimes six feet; sometimes followed by 
 an additional syllable. 
 
 Anaf^stio Metre consists of lines of two three, four Metres or 
 Anap»8te, with sometimes an additional syllable. 
 
 Iiesson QO,-^Composition. 
 
 Composition is the putting of words together Jj ««°\^«^^^^^^^^ 
 the Durpose of expressing our ideas m writing, m the best manner 
 accoSg to the 6ules of Grammar, and the best usages of the 
 language. , 
 
 Almost all the Exercises in the preceding Grammar, an*! especi- 
 ally trseuider the Rules of Syntax, have been framed with a 
 ?^eV to exercFse the pupil in the elementary parts of oomposition, 
 byTeading him to va?y ?iis ideas, and to express he same id^ m 
 Afferent forms; to detect and correct e«ors which o^en o<50ur m 
 the construction of sentences; and so to P^^ him on his jn^?^ 
 against similar errors; and also to form correct sentences for him- 
 aflf according to the particular directions laid down under the 
 various Ks. In committing his own ideas to writing, m the form 
 JcSmpStrons, then, all he has to do, is to endeavour to s^ect he 
 woper words, and to combine these so as to express his meaning 
 LXtira^rding to the Rules with which he is already supposed 
 to be familiar. The few following hints may be useful. 
 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS TO YOUNG COMPOSERS. 
 
 1. Spell every word correctly. Pay Pfoper attention to the use 
 of capUals; always using them where they should be, and never 
 where they should not be. [See Lesson 78J. 
 
 2. Carefully avoid all vulgar expressions and cant phrases and 
 naver use woVds which you do not understand, or wliich do not 
 
 8. At the end of the line, never divide a word of one syllable. 
 
 
t^w^msmk'iit 
 
 'm'^rrr 
 
 138 INTBODUCTIOH TO AKALTTIOAL GHAMMAB. 
 
 at all, but carry it to thfl next line. 
 
 4. When yoa have w,U.»jUat T0„ j^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ --„'»;" 
 T^Cl^^r.ZT^:^X''L''^P'' your meaning .ore 
 clearly' and mark the changes proposed. 
 
 5. Copy the -jjoleoverinasn^at disUo^t^andpla^^^ 
 
 X: In'Sfe b::t InCyou can, soVt^any person, as well as 
 yourself, may easily read and understand It. 
 
 dTffiouit affl^t. Tlittle practice will soon make it easy. 
 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 '"* "Tc^'brr'ThlyXSM'S rrfqVrTS,''^ 
 ruCy^w'h which th^y are not perfectly familiar. 
 
 "rTrfoUolingisavery^m^P^^^ 
 
 pupils may be directed to look at ace. tain p ^^^j^^^. 
 
 Uk or !^^F^Ply^,^^^l^^"^r^,nZd:yos, or telling them 
 
 Sefsrt'^irtVmrt&^^ffir^^od „iU furnish 
 » ndle'l variety of easy and useful exercises. 
 
 2. From pictures. «.c attention -y^^, 7:^j.r:Uhi^^^^^^^^ 
 The class may now be dire«te« to »uy oDje« j . ^^^ 
 
 view, which they ^^^^e rehired to decr^^^^^^ f„™itnre- 
 
 about, a« befo'e; f°' «='*™Plt!l^m of a ioumal-the principal 
 the business of f « ^ay 'n 'he fo'" 2J,J2™Lto the nortt- 
 
 "TTlher clL of rriL'n^jS^StforT^CvSn^lernt 
 
 ntr'l;'^rht:i?^mX"m^^^^^^ 
 
 "' ^nrn^if IhefarmerTn^different mechanic arts-narratives 
 T^t ar/entoTSing events that may have occurred. ___ 
 
COMPOSITION. 
 
 139 
 
 Qot be 
 •egin it 
 
 t oare- 
 , or by 
 g more 
 
 DoanneT 
 Lsfigure 
 LDg the 
 well as 
 
 one be- 
 sk little 
 
 ; begin- 
 ,o write 
 
 class of 
 Spelling 
 
 teacher 
 ing them 
 I his seat 
 with any 
 I furniBb 
 
 1 objects, 
 thin their 
 leir ideas 
 rniture— 
 principal 
 J north- 
 scribe his 
 { different 
 
 '5! Themes on familiar subjects may next be assigned, such as the 
 
 ^'^ Potfoiit the evils of the following vices and improprieties, and 
 „.a^rs?cS\*eLTks respecting theS as Y- ^^f g^tk l^^^^^^^ 
 Sying, Stealing, Swearing, DiBobedience to PareutB^^^^^ 
 inff. Discontentment, Intemperance, III °?*"rf' , Vinm^Lv Ac 
 
 In .11 cases with beginners, it is better '» "W«b^hey are®« 
 tbeii own thought, on f-^«« -^J^^ T,^^^, 'XXTo, 
 quainted, than to give them ^^Jf ™ *;• ™ ^ knowledge. In the 
 ^hieh they »? »»' ^^jXly ^i^^r.So™X4ts in their 
 former ca.e, they »'" J* ^^"'^ j^ |'J„ ,„ re«)rt to books, and in- 
 
 nfod^rs without perhaps, well understanding them. 
 
 should be pohited.out and ^''Pl'-S'f; JS''i^'„'„t to CS^^^^^^ 
 ~ffiffi''':S5^%tpietra':Jr?Icn:^1.{:S^ -oe,. iutoa 
 
 Having S0"« tV°"fV'r„„''*^h"e«r»d SriUrthe' ios- 
 
 [the END.] 
 
 be found 
 OS seasons 
 le various 
 narratives 
 
 red. 
 
 ; anything 
 »1, with its 
 
 "^^ 
 
trascsKuss:-! 
 
 TORONTO : 
 
 PRINTED BY LOVELL AND GIBSON, 
 
 YONGE STREET. 
 
J 
 
 K 
 
 % 
 
 ':i